Xerox Printer 4520 User Manual

The Xerox

4520/4520mp

Desktop Laser Printers

User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................... 1-1

Overview 1-2

Sharing the Printer 1-5

Memory Considerations 1-6

Chapter 2 Handling Paper ............................................. 2-1

Overview 2-3

Paper Input 2-4

Paper Output 2-5

Paper Specifications 2-6

Paper Trays 2-9

Optional Feeders 2-13

Summary of Paper Trays and Paper Sizes 2-17

Loading Paper 2-19

Selecting a Paper Source 2-30

Chapter 3 Using the Control Panel .............................. 3-1

Overview 3-3

Control Panel Features 3-4

Navigating the Menu System 3-8

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

❖

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s

Main Menu System 3-12

Language 3-14

PCL Menu 3-15

PostScript Menu 3-29

Interface Menu 3-38

System Menu 3-59

Test Menu 3-63

Reset Menu 3-67

Printer Settings that Affect Memory 3-69

Chapter 4 Using Fonts .................................................... 4-1

Overview 4-2

Fonts Resident on the Printer 4-4

Adding Fonts 4-8

Selecting a Font 4-11

Downloading Fonts 4-12

Chapter 5 Adding Printer Options ............................... 5-1

Overview 5-2

Installing a SIMM 5-5

Installing a Font Card 5-17

Chapter 6 Maintaining the Printer .............................. 6-1

Overview 6-2

Replacing the EP Cartridge 6-3

Adjusting the Print Density 6-12

Cleaning the Printer 6-14

Transporting the Printer 6-15

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ........................................... 7-1

Overview 7-2

Displayed Control Panel Messages 7-5

Paper Jams 7-27

ii ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s

Printer Operational Problems 7-40

Print Quality Problems 7-43

Appendix A Printer and Cable Specifications .............. A-1

Printer Specifications A-2

Cable Specifications A-5

Appendix B Printer Commands (Escape Sequences) ... B-1

Xerox-Unique Settings B-2

PCL Printer Commands B-3

HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands B-21

Control Codes B-25

Appendix C I/O Port Polling .............................................. C-1

Appendix D Ordering Information ................................. D-1

Printer Options D-2

Additional Order Items D-8

Appendix E Environmental Specifications .................... E-1

Glossary ....................................................................... GL-1

Index ........................................................................ IX-1

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

❖

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

iv ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1

Introduction

retpahC

Overview ............................................................................... 1-2

Printer Components 1-3

Factory Settings 1-4

Sharing the Printer ............................................................... 1-5

Memory Considerations ....................................................... 1-6

C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n

❖

1-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

The Xerox 4520/4520mp Desktop Laser Printers offer the

most cost-effective, high-performance solution to single-user

or networked printing of any advanced laser printer in their

class.

Overview

At 20 pages per minute, the 4520/4520mp printers provide

technically advanced features to ensure the high quality

Xerox printing you have come to expect:

•

800 dpi, 600 dpi, 400 dpi, and 300 dpi resolutions

Up to 50,000 printed pages per month

Power saver mode

Remote User Interface (RUI)

TrueRes for smooth edges and enhanced resolution

Three 250-sheet input trays, including support for A3 and

11" x 17" size paper

•

Optional high-capacity feeder (1500 sheets) and

high-capacity envelope feeder (250 envelopes)

Single-sheet bypass feeder (SBF) for single-sheet manual

feeding

Optional multi-sheet bypass feeder (MBF) for small

quantity specialized printing

•

Memory capacity up to 52 MBytes

Optional 125 MB Hard Disk

PCL 5e emulation and PostScript Level 2 PDLs (page

description languages)

•

Automatic switching between PCL emulation (hereinafter

referred to as PCL) and PostScript (when the PostScript

option is installed)

Ethernet, LocalTalk, and Token Ring network options,

each with a variety of protocols

•

Printing from ﬁve simultaneously-active ports

User installable printer and options

1-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

The key printer components are called out in Figure 1.1.

Printer

Components

Figure 1.1 Key printer parts

Top Output

Control Panel Display

Control Panel Cover

Front Output

Power Switch

Upper Paper Slot

Middle Paper Slot

Lower Paper Slot

Font Card Slots

Front View

Receptacle for

Optional Feeders

Manual Feed Slot

(SBF Slot)

Power Inlet

(behind panel)

Serial Port

Parallel Port

Network Ports 1, 2 & 3

Rear View

C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n

❖

1-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

The printer is controlled by numerous settings whose values

are pre-set at the factory. These values are called factory

settings.

Factory

Settings

If the factory settings do not suit the needs of your printing

environment, you can select a new setting in either of two

ways:

•

Control Panel on the printer. See Chapter 3: Using the

Control Panel.

Remote User Interface on the host computer. Refer to the

Document Services for Printing Guide.

1-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S h a r i n g t h e P r i n t e r

Particular care must be taken when changing settings for a

printer being shared by users such as those on a local area

network (LAN). When the printer is shared, settings must

accommodate the common needs of users.

Sharing the

Printer

Considerations for a networked environment include the

following:

•

Downloading fonts and macros by individual users may

consume printer memory. The sharing of downloaded

fonts must be coordinated. See Chapter 4: Using Fonts,

“Downloading Fonts” (page 4-12).

Switching between PCL and PostScript may purge

downloaded data. See Chapter 3: Using the Control

Panel, State Saving (page 3-28) for PCL and State Saving

(page 3-37) for PostScript.

Changing settings for Jam Recovery, Page Protection,

State Saving, or Resolution affect memory utilization. See

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, “Printer Settings that

Affect Memory” (page 3-69).

•

The type of interface. (See page 3-38, Appendix A, and

Appendix C.)

Auto Job End should be On. (See page 3-44, page 3-48,

page 3-54, page 3-58.)

Auto Continue should be On. (See page 3-61.)

LANs generally require a system or network administrator, a

person who orchestrates the use of the network. Refer to the

installation guide packaged with your network option for

more information.

C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n

❖

1-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M e m o r y C o n s i d e r a t i o n s

In today’s printing environments, technologies have

Memory

Considerations

advanced greatly but so have their corresponding memory

requirements. To make use of specialized graphics features,

fonts, and other applications on the market today, you may

ﬁnd it necessary to increase memory size.

From the factory, the 4520 is equipped with 4 MB of resident

base memory. The 4520mp is equipped with 4 MB of resident

base memory plus one 4 MB SIMM (single in-line memory

module) for a total of 8 MB.

Maximum memory capacity is 52 MB.

When is more memory needed?

•

You receive out-of-memory error messages when

printing. See Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel,“Printer

Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-69) for more

information on how certain printer settings may affect

memory usage and performance. See also “Minimum

Memory Requirements” (page 3-72).

•

You determine that expanded capability for additional

fonts, more complex documents, graphics, or higher

resolution is needed. See Chapter 4: Using Fonts,

“Downloading Fonts” (page 4-12) for more information on

how fonts affect memory usage.

How is more memory added?

•

Install a SIMM (single in-line memory module). SIMMs

are small circuit boards with memory chips that can be

installed on the printer controller board. See

Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options for more information

on SIMM installation.

Installing the 125 MB hard disk option does not add memory

to the printer.

1-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2

Handling Paper

retpahC

Overview ............................................................................... 2-3

Paper Input ............................................................................ 2-4

Paper Output ........................................................................ 2-5

Paper Speciﬁcations ............................................................. 2-6

Weight 2-6

Dimensions 2-7

Paper Trays ............................................................................ 2-9

Upper, Middle, and Lower Trays 2-10

Single-sheet Bypass Feeder (SBF) 2-12

Optional Feeders ................................................................ 2-13

Multi-sheet Bypass Feeder (MBF) 2-14

High-Capacity Feeder (HCF) 2-15

High-Capacity Envelope Feeder (HCEF) 2-16

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Summary of Paper Trays and Paper Sizes ......................... 2-17

Loading Paper ..................................................................... 2-19

Loading the Upper, Middle, or Lower Paper Tray 2-19

Feeding the SBF 2-24

Loading Letterhead, Pre-printed, Drilled, or Label Paper

2-27

Loading Envelopes 2-29

Selecting a Paper Source .................................................... 2-30

PCL Paper Sources 2-30

Printing a Page 2-31

Source Mapping Settings 2-33

Factory-Set Source Mapping Settings 2-35

Source Mapping Examples 2-36

Example 1 2-36

Example 2 2-37

Example 3 2-38

Example 4 2-39

Example 5 2-40

Example 6 2-41

Example 7 2-42

2-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

This chapter provides speciﬁc information on paper handling:

Overview

•

Paper speciﬁcations

Paper sources and paper trays

Manual feeding and loading of paper, including

letterhead, pre-printed stationery, envelopes, labels, and

transparencies

•

Paper source mapping

Printing

In this guide, paper source refers to the slot or opening where

paper enters the printer. Paper tray refers to the container or

device that holds the paper.

Note

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r I n p u t

Paper input sources are the slots or openings where paper

enters the printer. As shown in Figure 2.1, the 4520/4520mp

printers have four paper input sources: three on the front and

one on the back.

Paper

Input

Figure 2.1 Paper input sources

Upper Paper Source

Middle Paper Source

Lower Paper Source

Front View

Single-sheet Bypass

Feeder (SBF) Paper

Source

Rear View

2-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r O u t p u t

As shown in Figure 2.2, printed output is delivered face down

to the top output tray and face up to the front output tray.

Output capacity on top is up to 500 sheets of standard weight

paper and up to 250 sheets on the front.

Paper

Output

Figure 2.2 Output trays

Top Output Tray

(also known as the

HCOS: high-capacity

output stacker, or the

face down tray)

Front Output Tray

(also known as the

face up tray)

The front output tray must be removed to deliver printed

output to the top tray. Whenever the front tray is installed,

output is delivered to it.

Note

For optimum performance, deliver light weight paper

(60 gsm/16 lbs.) and special media (transparencies, label

stock, and envelopes) to the front output tray.

Depending on paper weight, you may ﬁnd the front output

tray holds fewer than 250 sheets. Paper jams may occur if

output capacity is exceeded.

Caution

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Factors such as embossing, special edges, and general paper

quality affect paper handling.

Paper

Speciﬁcations

Paper weight speciﬁcations include the following:

Weight

•

Upper, middle, and lower trays support paper weights of

60 gsm (16 lb) to 90 gsm (24 lb).

Single-sheet Bypass Feeder (SBF) supports paper weights

of 60 gsm (16 lb) to 120 gsm (32 lb).

For optimum printer performance, it is recommended that you

use paper made for laser printers and transparency ﬁlm made

for Xerox laser printers and copiers.

Note

The recommended weight of envelope paper should not

exceed 90 gms (24 lb) or jamming may result. Envelopes

should lay ﬂat. Do not use envelopes that are wrinkled,

nicked, or damaged.

In areas of high humidity, store partially used packages of

envelopes in a sealed plastic bag. Failure to do so may cause

excessive print jams and print quality problems.

Do not use envelopes having clasps, snaps, windows, or

synthetic materials. Severe damage to your printer may occur.

Caution

2-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Figure 2.3 shows paper dimensions in millimeters and inches.

Dimensions

Figure 2.3 Paper dimensions

Paper Size

Dimensions

210 x 297 mm

8.27 x 11.69 inches

Letter

216 x 279 mm

8.5 x 11 inches

B5 (ISO)

B4 (ISO)

Executive

176 x 250 mm

6.93 x 9.84 inches

250 x 352 mm

9.84 x 13.9 inches

184 x 267 mm

7.25 x 10.5 inches

148 x 210 mm

5.83 x 8.27 inches

Folio

216 x 330 mm

8.5 x 13 inches

Legal

216 x 356 mm

8.5 x 14 inches

Ledger

279 x 432 mm

11 x 17 inches

297 x 420 mm

11.2 x 16.4 inches

COM-10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

105 x 241 mm

4.13 x 9.5 inches

110 x 220 mm

4.33 x 8.66 inches

162 x 229 mm

6.38 x 9.02 inches

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

The Xerox printer driver supports all paper sizes in

Figure 2.3. However, if you do not install—or your application

does not use—the Xerox printer driver, some of these paper

sizes may not be available for your use. Refer to the

Document Services for Printing Guide for more information

on the Xerox printer driver.

Note

2-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r T r a y s

As shown in Figure 2.4, the 4520/4520mp printers are

Paper Trays

packaged with three 250-sheet paper trays and one

single-sheet bypass feeder (SBF).

Figure 2.4 Input trays

Single-sheet

Bypass Feeder

(SBF)

Upper Paper

Tray

Middle Paper

Tray

Lower Paper

Tray

Additional paper handling options are available. See

“Optional Feeders” (page 2-13) for more information on the

multi-sheet bypass feeder (MBF), the high-capacity feeder

(HCF), and the high-capacity envelope feeder (HCEF).

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r T r a y s

The upper, middle, and lower paper sources (page 2-4) each

accommodate a 250-sheet paper tray. A 250-sheet tray may

be either a ﬁxed tray (Figure 2.5) or a universal tray

(Figure 2.6).

Upper, Midd e, and

Lower Trays

Figure 2.5 Fixed trays

‡

Capacity

(Sheets)

†

Fixed Tray

Paper Size

250

8.5 x 11

Letter (8.5 x 11)

8.5 x 14

Legal (8.5 x 14)

11 x 17

Ledger (11 x 17)

† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-7.

‡ Tray capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper. Maximum paper stack:

25mm/1 inch.

Figure 2.6 Universal tray

‡

Capacity

(Sheets)

†

Paper Size

250

Letter (8.5 x 11)

Folio (8.5 x 13)

Legal (8.5 x 14)

Ledger (11 x 17)

† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-7.

‡ Tray capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper. Maximum paper stack:

25mm/1 inch.

See “Loading the Upper, Middle, or Lower Paper Tray”

(page 2-19) for further information on the universal tray.

2-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r T r a y s

To use letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper in

the upper, middle, or lower tray, see Figure 2.13 (page 2-27)

for paper orientation. See Figure 2.15 (page 2-29) for

envelope orientation.

Note

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r T r a y s

The single-sheet bypass feeder (SBF) provides for manually

feeding a single sheet of paper or labels, a single

transparency, or a single envelope (See Figure 2.7).

Single-sheet

Bypass Feeder

(SBF)

Figure 2.7 SBF

Letter (8.5 x 11)

B5 (ISO)

B4 (ISO)

Executive

Folio (8.5 x 13)

Legal (8.5 x 14)

Ledger (11 x 17)

Com-10

Transparency

Label sheet

As its name implies, the SBF bypasses the upper, middle, and

lower input printing paths.

Typical uses of the SBF include printing the ﬁrst page of a

document on letterhead paper or pre-printed stationery, and

printing any page of a document on paper of a different size,

color, or other attribute. See Figure 2.12 (page 2-26) for long

edge or short edge paper orientation.

Insert paper into the SBF only when needed. Do not store

paper in the SBF. If there is paper in it, the printer will print

from the SBF ﬁrst, regardless of paper size.

Note

To use letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper in

the SBF, see Figure 2.14 (page 2-28) for paper orientation. See

Figure 2.15 (page 2-29) for envelope orientation.

2-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O p t i o n a l F e e d e r s

The 4520/4520mp printers accommodate three optional

feeders that attach to the SBF source:

Optiona

Feeders

•

Multi-sheet bypass feeder (MBF). See page 2-14.

High-capacity feeder (HCF). See page 2-15.

High-capacity envelope feeder (HCEF). See page 2-16.

To install any of the optional feeders, you must remove the

SBF. Refer to the installation instructions provided with each

optional feeder.

Note

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O p t i o n a l F e e d e r s

The optional multi-sheet bypass feeder (MBF) provides for

small capacity printing needs. The MBF holds up to 100

sheets of standard weight (80 gsm. or 20 lb.) paper.

Mu ti-sheet

Bypass Feeder

(MBF)

Use only one size of paper in the MBF at one time. Do not

intermix paper sizes.

Load no more than 10 sheets of either B4 (ISO), Legal, or

Folio paper into the MBF at one time.

Note

Figure 2.8 MBF

Letter (8.5 x 11)

B5 (ISO)

B4 (ISO)

Executive

Folio (8.5 x 13)

Legal (8.5 x 14)

Com-10

Transparency

Labels

As its name implies, the MBF bypasses the upper, middle,

and lower input printing paths.

A typical use for the MBF is printing documents that require

special paper size, color, or other attribute.

See Figure 2.14 (page 2-28) for paper orientation, and

Figure 2.15 (page 2-29) for envelope orientation.

2-14 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O p t i o n a l F e e d e r s

The optional high-capacity feeder (HCF) provides for large

volume printing needs. The HCF holds up to 1500 sheets of

standard weight (80 gsm. or 20 lb.) paper and comes in two

paper sizes:

High-Capacity

Feeder (HCF)

•

8.5 x 11 (Letter)

Figure 2.9 shows an HCF with the door open and connected

to the printer.

Figure 2.9 HCF

For additional information about the HCF, see page 2-17; also

refer to the HCF Installation Instructions.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O p t i o n a l F e e d e r s

The optional high-capacity envelope feeder (HCEF) provides

for large volume envelope printing needs. The HCEF holds

up to 250 envelopes of standard weight and comes in two

sizes:

High-Capacity

Envelope Feeder

(HCEF)

•

Com-10

Figure 2.10 shows an HCEF with the door open and

connected to the printer.

Figure 2.10 HCEF

For additional information about the HCEF, see page 2-17

and page 2-29; also refer to the HCEF Installation

Instructions.

2-16 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S u m m a r y o f P a p e r T r a y s a n d P a p e r S i z e s

Figure 2.11 shows a summary of the paper accommodated by

each tray or feeder. A checkmark (✓) indicates support for the

paper size or media.

Summary of

Paper Trays

and Paper

Sizes

Figure 2.11 Tray and paper summary

†

Paper

Upper

Middle

Lower

SBF

✓

MBF

✓

HCF

✓

HCEF

✓

Letter (8.5 x 11)

B5 (ISO)

B4 (ISO)

Executive

✓

‡

✓

††

Folio (8.5 x 13)

Legal (8.5 x 14)

Ledger (11 x 17)

✓

Com-10

✓

Transparencies

Labels

† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-7.

‡ Fixed size tray only.

†† Universal tray only.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S u m m a r y o f P a p e r T r a y s a n d P a p e r S i z e s

Only one of the SBF, MBF, HCF, or HCEF may be installed at

any time. Manual single-sheet feeding is possible with the

SBF, MBF and HCF, but not the HCEF.

Note

Install the Xerox printer driver to access the entire range of

PCL paper source and source mapping settings speciﬁcally

designed for the 4520/4520mp printers. Refer to the

Document Services for Printing Guide.

2-18 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Loading Paper

To load paper into the upper, middle, or lower paper tray,

follow the steps below.

Loading the Upper,

Middle, or Lower

Paper Tray

Remove the tray from

the printer.

Place the tray on a ﬂat

surface.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Remove the tray cover.

If loading the

universal tray, adjust

the end and side

guides to the desired

paper size.

Paper sizes are marked

on the bottom of the

universal tray.

See Figure 2.6

(page 2-10) for

universal tray

information.

2-20 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Press the bottom of the

paper tray down to a

locked position.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Do not exceed the MAX

ﬁll line (shown on the

label on the inside wall of

the paper tray).

Caution

Load paper in the tray,

making sure the paper

is tucked under the

metal corners.

Use up to a maximum

of 250 sheets, a stack

less than 25 mm/

1 inch. Do not load

paper above the

maximum ﬁll marker.

If you are loading

letterhead or

pre-printed stationery,

see page 2-27. If

loading envelopes, see

page 2-29.

For optimum performance, load paper with the curl side up

when delivering to the front output tray (page 2-5). When

delivering paper to the top output tray (page 2-5), load paper

with the curl side down.

Note

2-22 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Insert the tray in the

printer.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

To feed paper into the SBF, follow the steps shown below.

Feeding the SBF

When manually feeding paper in the Single-sheet Bypass

Feeder (SBF), the Multi-sheet Bypass Feeder (MBF), or the

manual tray on the High Capacity Feeder (HCF), the printer

may fail to feed the sheet if the paper is removed and then

reinserted before the feed mechanism begins to move the

sheet. The printer may indicate Online/Processing...on

the control panel. If this occurs, open and close the top cover,

reinsert the paper in the feed slot and place the printer

Online via the control panel.

Note

Adjust the guides to

the desired paper size.

Make sure the guides

are snug against both

sides of the sheet but

not too tight as to

buckle it.

See Figure 2.7

(page 2-12) for SBF

information.

2-24 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Insert only one sheet

of paper, pre-printed

stationery,

transparency, label

paper, or envelope at a

time into the SBF.

If you are feeding

letterhead, pre-printed

stationery, or drilled

paper, see page 2-27.

See page 2-29 for

envelopes.

For best performance:

a ^{Stand facing the SBF straight on.}

b ^{Refer to Figure 2.12 (page 2-26) for the proper paper}

orientation (long edge or short edge ﬁrst).

c ^{Insert the sheet, guided by the side guides, at a}

steady rate.

d ^{Continue to insert the sheet until the lead edge of the}

sheet makes contact and a slight buckle forms.

e ^{To assure that the sheet is being introduced without}

skew, apply pressure ﬁrst on one side of the sheet

and then the other such that the entire lead edge of

the sheet makes full contact.

f ^{Maintain slight pressure on the sheet until the printer}

begins to pull in the sheet.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

The SBF guides indicate in a general way where to position

the paper. All sizes are centered in the SBF.

Note

If you are experiencing skew on the output, review

the instructions above and be sure each step is being

followed; check to be sure that the entire lead edge of

the sheet has bottomed out (the sheet should have a

slight buckle along the entire width).

Figure 2.12 shows SBF paper orientation. To print properly,

paper is inserted either long edge or short edge ﬁrst.

Figure 2.12 Long or short edge paper orientation

Paper Size

Long or Short Edge First

Long

Short

Long

Short

Letter (8.5 x 11)

B5 (ISO)

B4 (ISO)

Executive

Folio (8.5 x 13)

Legal (8.5 x 14)

Ledger (11 x 17)

Com-10

2-26 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Figure 2.13 illustrates the paper orientation needed to print

letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper in the

upper, middle, or lower tray. (Labels are not supported in

these trays. See Figure 2.14, page 2-28.)

Letterhead,

Pre-printed,

Drilled, or Label

Paper

Figure 2.13 Loading letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or

drilled paper in the upper, middle, or lower tray

(face down)

Of course, you may need to adjust your software application’s

printing margins to:

•

Prevent overwriting the letterhead or pre-printed images.

Prevent overwriting the drilled holes.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Figure 2.14 illustrates paper orientation in the SBF and MBF.

Figure 2.14 Loading letterhead, pre-printed stationery,

drilled, or label paper in the SBF or MBF

(face up)

Label paper may be loaded in the SBF or MBF only.

For optimum performance, use A4 or Letter size label paper.

Note

For additional SBF information, see page 2-12, page 2-17,

and page 2-24. For more about the MBF, see page 2-14 and

page 2-17; also refer to the MBF Installation Instructions.

2-28 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Figure 2.15 illustrates the envelope orientation needed to

print COM-10, DL, or C5 envelopes.

Envelopes

Figure 2.15 Loading envelopes

1. Adjust the guides to the desired envelope size.

Make sure that they are snug against both sides of the

envelope but not too tight as to buckle it.

2. Insert only one envelope at a time into the SBF.

For best performance:

— Stand facing the SBF straight on.

— Insert the envelope (refer to Figure 2.15), guided by

the side guides, at a steady rate.

— Continue to insert the envelope until its lead edge

makes contact and a slight buckle forms. Apply

pressure ﬁrst on one side of the envelope and then the

other so that the lead edge makes full contact.

— Maintain slight pressure on the envelope until the

printer begins to pull in the envelope.

To print envelopes, use the high-capacity envelope feeder

(HCEF), SBF, or MBF only.

Note

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

For a print job, your software application sends information,

called the Printer Control Language (PCL), to the printer to

communicate paper source and page size. How the printer

interprets the PCL command for paper source and page size

depends on the printer menu settings for Source Mapping

and MBF Paper Size. If PCL commands for paper source and

page size are not sent to the printer, the printer menu settings

for Paper Size and Default Source are used. See

Selecting a

Paper Source

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel for further information on

these and all PCL Menu settings (page 3-15).

PostScript functions differently than PCL. Refer to the

PostScript Installation Instructions for more information.

Note

Paper source is a term that describes the tray, feeder, or slot

PCL Paper Sources

from which the printer feeds paper.

PCL, and therefore your printer, recognizes the six paper

sources shown in Figure 2.16, which may, or may not, appear

in your software application.

Figure 2.16 Six PCL paper sources

PCL Paper Source

Upper

Alternate Names

Upper, Paper Tray, Paper Cassette

Manual, Manual Feed

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Envelope Manual Feed

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Paper Deck

2-30 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

When a print job is received by the printer, the sequence to

select the paper tray for each page is as follows:

Printing a Page

1. Page size is established.

If page size is not sent by the application, the PCL Menu

setting called Paper Size is used.

2. Paper source is established.

If a paper source is sent by the application, it will be one

of the six PCL paper sources listed in Figure 2.16.

If paper source is not sent by the application, the PCL

Menu setting called Default Source is used. Some

software applications have a paper source called “Auto

Select” or “Auto Sheet Feed.” When used, this results in

a PCL paper source being omitted from the print job.

3. When the printer is ready to print the page, tray sequence

is established.

For the paper source chosen in the second step above, a

tray or sequence of trays is taken from the PCL Menu

Source Mapping setting for that source. For settings, see

Figure 2.18 (page 2-35).

4. The printer searches in the tray or in any tray in the tray

sequence for the correct page size from the ﬁrst step

above.

In a tray sequence, the trays are searched left to right as

they appear in the Source Mapping setting. For example,

for sequence Up-Mid-Low, the upper tray is searched

ﬁrst, the middle tray second, and the lower tray third.

5. If a tray with the correct paper size is found, the page is

printed from that tray.

If no tray with the correct paper size is found, the tray

sequence and paper size are displayed on the Control

Panel along with a message to load the correct paper size.

Printing halts.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

— Put paper of the requested size in a tray in the tray

sequence and the page will be printed.

— Or, press Enter

to print from the ﬁrst tray in the

tray sequence, regardless of paper size. If that tray

becomes empty, the next tray with the same paper

size will be used. This source and size will be used

until the printer receives a new page containing a

PCL paper source, page size, or reset command.

2-32 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

For each of the six PCL paper sources (Figure 2.16,

page 2-30), a Source Mapping setting from Figure 2.17 is

used. You may change settings depending on your printing

needs. For details, see “Factory-Set Source Mapping

Settings” (page 2-35), “Source Mapping Examples”

(page 2-36), and Source Mapping (page 3-22).

Source Mapping

Settings

Figure 2.17 Source Mapping settings

Source Mapping

Description

setting

Upper

Middle

Tray or tray sequence to be used for each

of the six PCL paper sources.

Lower

Upper-Middle

Upper-Lower

Middle-Lower

Up-Mid-Low

Manual

Tray selection appearing when there is no

MBF, HCF, or HCEF installed.

Use this selection to print the ﬁrst page

of a print job by feeding a single sheet of

paper into the SBF slot before the print

job starts.

MBF

Tray selection appearing when the MBF

(page 2-14) is installed.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

Figure 2.17 Source Mapping settings (continued)

Source Mapping

setting

Description

HCEF

Tray or tray sequence appearing when

the HCEF (page 2-16) is installed.

HCEF-Upper

HCEF-Middle

HCEF-Lower

HCEF-Up-Mid

HCEF-Up-Low

HCEF-Mid-Low

HCEF-Up-Mid-Low

HCF

Tray or tray sequence appearing when

the HCF (page 2-15) is installed.

HCF-Upper

HCF-Middle

HCF-Lower

HCF-Up-Mid

HCF-Up-Low

HCF-Mid-Low

HCF-Up-Mid-Low

2-34 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

Figure 2.18 shows the factory-set Source Mapping defaults

for the six PCL paper sources, and how the settings change

when the optional MBF, H C F, or HCEF is installed and Reset

Menusis implemented. See Chapter 3: Using the Control

Panel, “Reset Menu” (page 3-67).

Factory-Set Source

Mapping Settings

Figure 2.18 Factory settings for Source Mapping

PCL Paper

Base Model

With MBF

With HCF

With HCEF

Source

Upper

Up-Mid-Low

Manual

Up-Mid-Low

MBF

HCF-Up-Mid-Low

Manual

Up-Mid-Low

HCEF

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Manual

MBF

Manual

HCEF

Lower

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Up-Mid-Low

Manual

Up-Mid-Low

MBF

HCF

Up-Mid-Low

HCEF

Manual

Only one of the SBF, MBF, HCF, or HCEF may be installed at

any time. Manual single-sheet feeding is possible with the

SBF, MBF, and HCF, but not the HCEF.

Note

Install the Xerox printer driver to access the entire range of

PCL paper source and source mapping settings speciﬁcally

designed for the 4520/4520mp printers. Refer to the

Document Services for Printing Guide.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

Review the following Source Mapping examples to take full

Source Mapping

Examples

advantage of the 4520/4520mp capabilities.

All examples assume that Default Source is set to Upper.

You do not have a MBF or HCF installed. You want to load as

much paper in the printer as possible. You use only one size

of paper.

Example 1

1. Load the upper, middle, and lower trays with regular

paper stock.

2. Set Source Mapping for “Upper” to “Up-Mid-Low.”

3. In either your software application or the Xerox printer

driver, set paper source to the upper tray.

The printer will pull paper from the upper tray until is it

empty, then from the middle tray until it is empty, and then

from the lower tray until it is empty. As soon as the upper or

middle tray is reloaded, the printer will pull paper from them

again.

The Source Mapping setting determines from where the

printer pulls paper.

For the paper sources you intend not to use, always set Source

Mapping to the same setting as that used for your regular

paper stock. You will avoid unexpected results if those paper

sources are used by mistake.

Note

The examples suggest using speciﬁc PCL paper sources but

generally you may substitute any source to ﬁt your printing

needs.

Note

2-36 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

You have a HCF installed. You want to load as much paper in

the printer as possible. You use only one size of paper.

Example 2

1. Load the HCF, upper, middle, and lower trays with

regular paper stock.

2. Set Source Mapping for “Upper” to “HCF-Up-Mid-Low.”

3. In either your software application or the Xerox printer

driver, set paper source to the upper tray.

The printer will pull paper from the HCF until it is empty,

then from the upper tray until is it empty, then from the

middle tray until it is empty, and ﬁnally from the lower tray.

As soon as the HCF, upper, or middle tray is reloaded, the

printer will pull paper from them again.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

You do not have a HCF installed. You want to print mostly on

Letter (8.5 x 11) paper but sometimes on Legal (8.5 x 14).

Example 3

1. Load the upper and middle trays with Letter paper stock.

2. Load the lower tray with Legal paper stock.

3. Set Source Mapping for “Upper” to “Upper-Middle.”

4. Set Source Mapping for “Lower” to “Lower.”

5. In either your software application or the Xerox printer

driver, set paper source to:

— Upper tray for Letter pages.

— Lower tray for Legal pages.

The printer will pull Letter paper from the upper tray until is

it empty, then from the middle tray. It will pull Legal paper

from the lower tray.

Alternatively, you could set Source Mapping for “Upper” to

“Up-Mid-Low” and set your application paper source to the

upper tray for both Letter and Legal pages. The printer will

automatically switch between the trays according to the

paper size requested. The disadvantage is that Control Panel

messages may be misleading. Whether alerting you to load

Letter or Legal paper, the Control Panel will always display

“Up-Mid-Low” as the location to load that paper size. You

must know which paper size goes into which tray.

2-38 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

You have a HCF installed. You want to print mostly on Letter

(8.5 x 11) paper but sometimes on Legal (8.5 x 14). Some of

the Legal pages need to be on color or pre-printed paper.

Example 4

1. Load the HCF and middle trays with Letter paper stock.

2. Load the upper tray with white Legal paper stock.

3. Load the lower tray with color or pre-printed Legal paper.

4. Set Source Mapping for “Large Capacity” to

“HCF-Middle.”

5. Set Source Mapping for “Upper” to “Upper.”

6. Set Source Mapping for “Lower” to “Lower.”

7. In either your software application or the Xerox printer

driver, set paper source to:

— Large Capacity for Letter pages.

— Upper tray for Legal pages (white stock).

— Lower tray for Legal pages (color or pre-printed

stock).

The printer will pull Letter pages from the HCF or middle tray

when the HCF is empty. It will pull white Legal pages from

the upper tray. It will pull color or pre-printed Legal pages

from the lower tray.

Alternatively, you could set the Source Mapping for “Upper”

to “HCF-Up-Mid” and set your application paper source to

the upper tray for both Letter and white Legal pages. The

printer will automatically switch between the trays

according to the paper size requested. The only

disadvantage is that Control Panel messages may be

misleading. Whether alerting you to load Letter or Legal

paper, the Control Panel will always display “HCF-Up-Mid”

as the location to load that paper size. You must know which

paper size goes into which tray.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

You do not have a MBF or HCF installed. You want to print

mostly on white A4 paper but sometimes on color A4 paper.

You occasionally print on DL envelopes.

Example 5

1. Load the upper and middle trays with white A4 paper

stock.

2. Load the lower tray with color A4 paper stock.

3. Set Source Mapping for “Upper” to “Upper-Middle.”

4. Set Source Mapping for “Lower” to “Lower.”

5. Set Source Mapping for “Manual” and “Manual

Envelope” to “Manual.”

6. In either your software application or the Xerox printer

driver, set paper source to:

— Upper tray for A4 pages (white stock).

— Lower tray for A4 pages (color stock).

— Manual for DL envelopes. (You could have also set

paper source to Manual Envelope for DL envelopes.)

The printer will pull white A4 paper from the upper tray until

it is empty and then from the middle tray. It will pull color A4

pages from the lower tray. For each DL envelope, the printer

halts and the Control Panel displays a message requesting a

DL envelope to be manually fed through the SBF. Insert one

envelope into the SBF and it will feed.

2-40 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

You have a MBF installed. You want to print mostly on white

A4 size paper but sometimes on DL size envelopes.

Occasionally, you print on color A4 size paper.

Example 6

1. Load the upper and middle trays with white A4 paper

stock.

2. Load the lower tray with color A4 paper stock.

3. Load the MBF with DL envelopes.

4. Set Source Mapping for “Upper” to “Upper-Middle.”

5. Set Source Mapping for “Lower” to “Lower.”

6. Set Source Mapping for “Manual” and “Manual

Envelope” to “MBF.”

7. Set MBF Paper Size to “DL.”

8. In either your software application or the Xerox printer

driver, set paper source to:

— Upper tray for A4 pages (white stock).

— Lower tray for A4 pages (color stock).

— Manual for DL envelopes. (You could have also set

paper source to Manual Envelope for DL envelopes.)

The printer will pull white A4 paper from the upper tray until

it is empty, then from the middle tray. It will pull color A4

pages from the lower tray. It will pull DL envelopes from the

MBF.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

❖

2-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

P a p e r S o u r c e

You do not have a MBF or HCF installed. You want to use

pre-printed stationery for the ﬁrst page and regular stock for

the other pages of your document. Your software application

has the capability to ask for the ﬁrst page of a document from

a different source than the rest of the document. (The Xerox

PCL 5e emulation Windows printer driver also has this

capability.) It is assumed your pre-printed stationery is the

same size as your regular stock.

Example 7

1. Load the upper and middle trays with the regular paper

stock.

2. Load the lower tray with the pre-printed stationery.

3. Set Source Mapping for “Upper” to “Upper-Middle.”

4. Set Source Mapping for “Lower” to “Lower.”

5. In either your software application or the Xerox PCL 5e

emulation Windows printer driver, set paper source for

the ﬁrst page to Lower and set paper source for the

remaining pages to Upper.

The printer will pull the ﬁrst page from the lower tray and

all other pages from the upper then middle trays.

2-42 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3

Using the Control Panel

retpahC

Overview ............................................................................... 3-3

Control Panel Features ......................................................... 3-4

The Display 3-4

The Keys 3-5

Navigating the Menu System .............................................. 3-8

Menu System Indicators 3-9

Setting a Menu Option 3-10

Main Menu System ............................................................. 3-12

Language ............................................................................. 3-14

Language Options 3-14

PCL Menu ............................................................................ 3-15

PCL Menu Hierarchy 3-15

PCL Menu Options 3-18

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PostScript Menu .................................................................. 3-29

PostScript Menu Hierarchy 3-30

PostScript Menu Options 3-32

Interface Menu ................................................................... 3-38

Interface Menu Hierarchy 3-38

Parallel Menu Options 3-42

Serial Menu Options 3-46

LocalTalk Menu Option 3-51

Ethernet Menu Options 3-52

Token Ring Menu Options 3-55

System Menu ...................................................................... 3-59

System Menu Hierarchy 3-59

System Menu Options 3-60

Test Menu ............................................................................ 3-63

Test Menu Hierarchy 3-63

Test Menu Functions 3-64

Reset Menu ......................................................................... 3-67

Reset Menu Hierarchy 3-67

Reset Menu Functions 3-67

Printer Settings that Affect Memory ................................. 3-69

Minimum Memory Requirements 3-72

3-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

Shown in Figure 3.1, the Control Panel is both informative

and interactive. Not only does it display status and user

actions required, the Control Panel also enables you to

change printer settings to control how the 4520/4520mp

printer operates in your environment.

Overview

Figure 3.1 Control Panel

This chapter describes the following:

•

Control Panel display and keys

Control Panel menu selections

Guidelines for conﬁguring the printer to meet your

printing needs

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s

The two major components of the 4520/4520mp Control Panel

Control Panel

Features

are shown in Figure 3.2.

Figure 3.2 Control Panel components

Two-line by 16-character Display

Eight Control Keys

The Display

The Control Panel’s display:

•

Presents a hierarchy of menu options and settings to

conﬁgure and control the printer.

See “Navigating the Menu System” (page 3-8) for

information on the menu system hierarchy.

•

Informs you of printer status conditions such as when

toner is low, where to load paper, a disk failure, and so on.

See Chapter 7: Troubleshooting, “Displayed Control Panel

Messages” (page 7-5), for a complete list of messages.

3-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s

As described in Figure 3.3, the Control Panel keypad consists

of eight keys, identiﬁed as international symbols and labeled

in English.

The Keys

Figure 3.3 Control Panel keys and their functions

Key

Description

Toggles between online and ofﬂine.

Online

When online, the printer is able to receive and print pages.

When ofﬂine, page processing and printing halts, but the printer is still able to respond to

status requests. You must take the printer ofﬂine to:

• Access the menu system with Menu

or Reset

• Insert or remove a font card.

• Perform tasks such as forcing a form feed for a partially printed page.

The printer goes ofﬂine automatically when it has a fault condition such as a paper jam or

an open cover. Use Online

to put the printer back online after correcting such

conditions.

The online message indicates a “closed” switch; that is, printing continues:

Online ___

The ofﬂine message indicates an “open” switch; that is, printing halts:

Offline _/_

Displays the Reset Menu and the ﬁrst function: Reset Printer.

Press Up or Down repeatedly to step through the other Reset Menu functions

one at a time. See“Reset Menu” (page 3-67).

Reset

The printer must be ofﬂine for Reset

to function.

Prints a partial page if one exists in the printer.

Form Feed

It does not send a blank sheet of paper through the printer.

The printer must be ofﬂine for Form Feed

to function.

Form Feed only works in PCL mode, not in PostScript. See “PCL Menu” (page 3-15)

for more information.

Displays the Main Menu and the ﬁrst submenu: Language.

The printer must be ofﬂine for Menu

In any submenu, press Menu

to function.

to take you to the top of the Main Menu. See “Main

Menu System” (page 3-12) for a full description.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s

Figure 3.3 Control Panel keys and their functions (continued)

Key

Esc

Description

In the menu system, exits the current menu level and returns to the previous one.

Press Esc

at any time in the menu system to take you to the previous level. No

changes to values will be saved unless you ﬁrst press Enter

Press Esc

while at Reset Menu or the top level of Main Menu to exit either menu.

In the menu system, accesses, sets, or invokes the displayed submenu, value, or function.

Enter

• When a submenu is displayed, press Enter

to access a submenu.

_{• When a printer setting is displayed, such as Copies, press Enter}Po_{to set the current}

value as the default value.

• In PCL, press Enter

• When a printer action is displayed, such as any of the Test Menu (page 3-63) or Reset

to override a paper mismatch.

Menu (page 3-67) functions, press Enter

to invoke the action.

Out of the menu system, acts as a Continue key.

• After certain error conditions when Auto Continue is Off, press Enter

the printing process. See Auto Continue (page 3-61) for more information.

to continue

3-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s

Figure 3.3 Control Panel keys and their functions (continued)

Key

Description

In the menu system, scrolls backward (up) through submenus or through the current list of

values or functions.

For numeric values such as number of Copies, press Up

to increase the number.

to display the last item

Scrolling wraps—if the ﬁrst item in a list is displayed, press Up

in the list.

Press Up

for more than two seconds to scroll continuously. During scrolling, there

may be a greater increment for each step than that for single presses. For example, for the

PCL Menu setting Pitch (page 3-20), the single press increment is 0.01 whereas the scrolling

increment is 1.00.

When the hard disk option has been installed, press Up

to respond to a disk failure

error message. Pressing Up will reformat the hard disk. See

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting, “Displayed Control Panel Messages” (page 7-5), for more

information on hard disk failure error messages.

In the menu system, scrolls forward (down) through the submenus or through the current

list of values or actions.

Down

For numeric values such as number of Copies, press Down

to decrease the number.

to display the ﬁrst

Scrolling wraps—if the last item in a list is displayed, press Down

item in the list.

Press Down

for more than two seconds to scroll continuously. During scrolling, there

may be a greater increment for each step than that for single presses. For example, for the

PCL Menu setting Pitch (page 3-20), the single press increment is 0.01 whereas the scrolling

increment is 1.00.

When the hard disk option has been installed, press Down

failure error message. Hard disk usage will be aborted when Down

to respond to a disk

is pressed. See

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting, “Displayed Control Panel Messages” (page 7-5), for more

information on hard disk failure error messages.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m

The 4520/4520mp Control Panel contains two menu

structures:

Navigating the

Menu System

•

Main Menu and its submenus:

— Language

— PCL Menu

— PostScript Menu (when the PostScript option is

installed)

— Interface Menu

— System Menu

— Test Menu

The Main Menu system is accessed by pressing

Each of the submenus may have other

submenus, settings, or functions. See “Main Menu

System” (page 3-12) for more information.

•

Reset Menu and its functions:

— Reset Printer

— Reset Menus

— Reset All

— Cancel PS Job (when the PostScript option is

installed)

The Reset Menu is accessed by pressing Reset

There are no submenus. See “Reset Menu” (page 3-67).

Take the printer ofﬂine (page 3-5) to access the Main Menu or

the Reset Menu.

Note

3-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m

As shown in Figure 3.4, three symbols called indicators may

Menu System

Indicators

appear on menu displays.

Figure 3.4 Menu indicator symbols on the Control Panel display

Symbol

Description

Example

Indicates another menu level below this one.

Main Menu

Language

Indicates that a value or setting follows the option on Language

the bottom line.

Français

After a setting, indicates it is the current value.

Language

English

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m

To set a Main Menu option or to invoke a Test Menu or Reset

Menu function, follow the steps below:

Setting a

Menu Option

Press Online

You will see:

Offline

to take the printer ofﬂine.

_/_

Press a key...

Press Menu

to access the Main Menu or press

Reset

to access the Reset Menu.

Press Down

or Up

to scroll through the list

of submenus, options, or functions.

When you see the submenu, option, or function you

want, press Enter

If you selected a submenu or option you did not want,

press Esc

to return to the previous level, then

make the selection you want and press Enter

accept it.

If necessary, repeat Step 3 and Step 4 to go through

submenu levels to reach all desired options or

functions.

If many possibilities exist, such as 1 through 99 for

number of Copies, you can scroll quickly by holding

down the key.

After pressing Enter

to accept a setting, you will

brieﬂy see on the top line of the display:

* saved *

This indicates the value has been saved as the current

setting.

3-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m

You may either continue to work in the menu system

by repeating the steps above, or exit and return to

normal operation by pressing Online

If you press Online

not be saved.

before Enter

the value will

Caution

Other ways to exit a menu option or the menu system

completely are as follows:

•

In the Main Menu, press Menu

top of the Main Menu.

to return to the

•

Press Esc

from Main Menu or Reset Menu to

exit the menu system and display the following

message:

Offline

_/_

Press a key...

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M a i n M e n u S y s t e m

The Main Menu system is hierarchical, based on a cascading

system of submenus, each containing other submenus or

options designed to conﬁgure the printer for your

environment. The Main Menu hierarchy is depicted in

Figure 3.5 (page 3-13).

Main Menu

System

In this chapter, factory settings are shown boldfaced and

followed by an asterisk (*). See Chapter 1: Introduction

(page 1-4) for a deﬁnition of factory setting.

Note

When you change a factory setting or an existing setting to a

new value, the new value becomes the current setting.

On the printer, the current setting always appears ﬁrst in a list

of values and is followed by an asterisk (*). The other possible

values are located by pressing Up

or Down

to scroll

through the list.

See “Reset Menu” (page 3-67) for information on how to

revert to factory settings.

3-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M a i n M e n u S y s t e m

Figure 3.5 Main Menu hierarchy

Language

Deutsch

English

Español

Français

Français canad.

Italiano

Português (BRA)

PCL Menu

See Figure 3.7 (page 3-16).

See Figure 3.9 (page 3-31).

See Figure 3.11 (page 3-39).

See Figure 3.18 (page 3-60).

See Figure 3.20 (page 3-64).

PostScript Menu^†

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

^†Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L a n g u a g e

Language includes a list of international languages used to

display messages on the Control Panel and used to print text

on the Conﬁguration Sheet (page 3-64).

Language

Figure 3.6 shows the Language options and their English

equivalent. See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the

steps to ﬁnd and change the language setting.

Language

Options

The Language option is not changed by the Reset Menus

function (page 3-67).

Note

Figure 3.6 Language options

Option

English Equivalent

Deutsch

English

Español

Français

German

International English

Spanish

French

Français canad.

Italiano

French Canadian

Italian

Português (BRA)

Brazilian Portuguese

3-14 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

PCL Menu options establish the default conﬁguration for the

printer. PCL (Printer Control Language) is used by software

applications to send information and instructions to the

printer.

PCL Menu

The PCL Menu hierarchy is depicted in Figure 3.7

(page 3-16).

PCL Menu

Hierarchy

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.7 PCL Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

Language

PCL Menu

Copies

1* - 99

PostScript Menu^‡

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Font Source

Internal*

Upper^†

Lower^†

Soft^†

Font Number

Pitch

0* - 999

Upper

Middle

Lower

.44 - 99.99 by .01

(10.00*)

Upper-Middle

Upper-Lower

Middle-Lower

Up-Mid-Low

Manual

Point Size

4.00 - 999.75 by .25

(12.00*)

MBF^‡

HCEF^‡

HCEF-Upper^‡

HCEF-Middle^‡

HCEF-Lower^‡

HCEF-Up-Mid^‡

HCEF-Up-Low^‡

HCEF-Mid-Low^‡

HCEF-Up-Mid-Low^‡

HCF^‡

Default Source

Upper*

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Large Capacity^‡

Envelope Feeder^‡

HCF-Upper^‡

HCF-Middle^‡

HCF-Lower^‡

HCF-Up-Mid^‡

HCF-Up-Low^‡

HCF-Mid-Low^‡

HCF-Up-Mid-Low^‡

Source Mapping

Upper

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Appears only when the default font is scalable.

^†Appears when font cards are installed or downloaded fonts are available.

^‡Appears only when the option is installed.

3-16 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.7 PCL Menu hierarchy showing factory settings (continued)

A3 (297x420)

Paper Size

Ledger (11x17)

B4 (250x352)

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)*

(USA)

MBF Paper Size

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)*

(USA)

A4 (210x297)*

(Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

A4 (210x297)*

(Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Form Length

005 - 128

64* (Europe)

60* (USA)

Desktop

ISO L1

ISO L2

ISO L5

ISO-4 UK

ISO-6 ASCII

ISO-11 Swedish

ISO-15 Italian

ISO-17 Spanish

ISO-21 German

ISO-60 Norw. v1

ISO-69 French

Legal

Symbol Set

Page Protection

Off*

A4 (210x297)

Legal (8.5x14)

Letter (8.5x11)

Ledger (11x17)

A3 (297x420)

Math-8

Microsoft Publ.

PC-8

PC-8 DN

PC-8 Tk

PC-850

PC-852

Pi Font

PS Math

PS Text

Jam Recovery

Resolution

Off*

300x300

600x600*

400x400

800x800

Roman-8*

Ventura Int’l.

Ventura Math

Ventura US

Win 3.0

TrueRes

Off

On*

Win L1

Win L2

State Saving

Off*

Win L5

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

PCL Menu options and their settings are described in

Figure 3.8 (page 3-19). Factory settings are boldfaced,

followed by an asterisk (*). See “Setting a Menu Option”

(page 3-10) for the steps to ﬁnd and change a setting, or refer

to the Document Services for Printing Guide to use the RUI to

change settings.

PCL Menu

Options

Settings for certain PCL Menu options may be overridden

from many software applications. If your software application

speciﬁes a value for any option below, the printer PCL Menu

setting will be ignored:

•

Copies

Font Source

Font Number

Pitch

Point Size

Default Source

Paper Size

Orientation

Form Length

Symbol Set

The Xerox printer driver allows your software application to

specify three additional PCL Menu options:

•

Page Protection

Resolution

TrueRes

Note

3-18 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Copies

Setting

Description

1* - 99

Number of times each page is printed.

Most software applications override this setting. If

your application does not, the printer assumes the

default setting here.

Internal*

Upper^†

Lower^†

Soft^†

Location of the default font in PCL.

Font Source

Internal refers to the font set residing in the printer’s

permanent memory. These fonts are resident in the

printer and cannot be altered.

Upper and Lower refer to the two font card slots and

appear only when a font card is installed in a slot. See

Chapter 1: Introduction (page 1-3) for location of the

font card slots.

When a font card contains its own default font, the

current Font Source setting is overridden. You must

change the Font Source setting if you do not want to

use the default font on the font card.

Soft refers to fonts permanently downloaded to either

printer memory or to a printer hard disk. Soft appears

only if there is a permanently downloaded font.

The Font Source setting returns to its

factory setting (“Internal”) if Symbol Set

(page 3-25) is changed.

Note

If the Font Source setting speciﬁes a

location other than “Internal,” Font

Number (page 3-20) reverts to 0

automatically.

†

Upper and Lower appear

only when a font card is

installed. Soft appears

when there is a

downloaded font.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

0* - 999

Default font in PCL.

Font Number

Only Font Number values valid for the Font Source

location (page 3-19) are displayed. For example, if you

have internal fonts only, the maximum Font Number

is 56.

Font Number values are printed on the PCL Font

List (page 3-65) in the ﬁrst column. Print a PCL Font

List to ﬁnd the correct number to use with this

setting.

The Font Number setting returns to its

factory setting (0) if the Symbol Set

(page 3-25) default is changed.

Note

If the Font Source setting (page 3-19)

speciﬁes a location other than

“Internal,” Font Number reverts to 0

automatically.

.44 - 99.99 by .01

(10.00*)

Number of characters per inch (cpi) for the font

represented by Font Number (page 3-20).

Pitch

Appears only when the Font Number setting

speciﬁes a scalable ﬁxed pitch font, such as Courier.

increments pitch at .01 cpi, from .44 to

decrements at .01 cpi.

99.99 cpi. Down

Most software applications override this setting. If

your application does not, the printer assumes the

default setting here.

3-20 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

4.00 - 999.75 by .25

(12.00*)

Point size (a measurement for type height, 1 point

equals 0.351 mm or approximately 1/72 inch) for the

font represented by Font Number (page 3-20).

Point Size

Appears only when the Font Number setting

speciﬁes a scalable proportional spaced font, such as

Times New Roman.

Most software applications override this setting. If

your application does not, the printer assumes the

default setting here.

Upper*

Manual

Default paper source in PCL if none is speciﬁed by

your software application.

Default Source

Manual Envelope

Lower

The printer uses Default Source when there is no

paper source speciﬁed in the print job. Some software

applications have a paper source selection called

“Auto Select” or “Auto Sheet Feed” which usually

results in the omission of a paper source selection in a

print job.

Large Capacity^†

Envelope Feeder^†

When the printer uses Default Source, Source

Mapping (page 3-22) is used to determine the actual

tray or slot from which the printer pulls paper. See

Chapter 2: Handling Paper, “Selecting a Paper

Source” (page 2-30) for more information on the

interaction of Default Source and Source Mapping.

†

Appears only when the

HCF (for Large Capacity)

or HCEF (for Envelope

Feeder) option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Upper

Middle

Lower

Source Mapping enables you to control from your

software application the location from which the

printer pulls paper.

Source Mapping

Options (Paper Sources):

Upper

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Upper-Middle

Upper-Lower

Middle-Lower

Up-Mid-Low

Manual^†

Each of the six paper sources that can be requested

through your application maps to one of the Source

Mapping settings.

Lower is the factory setting for the Lower paper

source. Up-Mid-Low is the factory setting for Upper

and Large Capacity. Manual is the factory setting for

Manual, Manual Envelope, and Envelope Feeder. See

Figure 2.18 (page 2-35) for a table of factory settings.

MBF^‡

HCEF^‡

HCEF-Upper^‡

HCEF-Middle^‡

HCEF-Lower^‡

HCEF-Up-Mid^‡

HCEF-Up-Low^‡

HCEF-Mid-Low^‡

HCEF-Up-Mid-Low^‡

HCF^‡

When a paper source (e.g., Upper) is mapped to a

sequence of trays (e.g., Up-Mid-Low), the printer may

switch between them for two purposes:

1) To increase paper capacity.

When the current tray becomes empty, the

printer automatically switches to the next tray in

the sequence, provided the paper size is the

same. For large print jobs, this gives time to

reload paper in a tray without the printing being

interrupted.

HCF-Upper^‡

HCF-Middle^‡

HCF-Lower^‡

HCF-Up-Mid^‡

HCF-Up-Low^‡

HCF-Mid-Low^‡

HCF-Up-Mid-Low^‡

2) To search for the correct paper size to print a

page.

If the paper size speciﬁed in your software

application does not match what is loaded in the

current tray, the printer automatically searches

the next tray in the sequence for a paper size that

matches.

†

Appears only when the

SBF is installed.

For more information on taking full advantage of

Source Mapping and for detailed examples of usage,

see “Selecting a Paper Source” (page 2-30).

‡

Appears only when the

option is installed.

3-22 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

A3 (297x420)

Paper size used to print a page if no paper size is

speciﬁed by your software application.

Paper Size

Ledger (11x17)

B4 (250x352)

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)* (USA)

A4 (210x297)* (Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

The Xerox printer driver supports all Paper Size

settings. However, without the Xerox printer driver

installed, not all paper sizes may be supported by your

software application.

The Defaults setting (page 3-61) in the System Menu

determines whether the factory setting for Paper

Size is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11)”.

See Figure 2.3 (page 2-7)

for more paper

dimensions.

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)* (USA)

A4 (210x297)* (Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

Applies only when the optional Multi-sheet Bypass

Feeder (MBF) is installed.

MBF Paper Size

MBF Paper Size communicates the paper size

feeding through the MBF. The MBF does not have a

size sensor; therefore, you must explicitly tell the

printer what MBF paper size to expect. The printer

compares the paper size communicated in the print

job to the MBF Paper Size setting. If different, the

printer displays a message informing you what paper

size to feed through the MBF.

The Defaults setting (page 3-61) in the System Menu

determines whether the factory setting for MBF

Paper Size is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11)”.

See Figure 2.3 (page 2-7)

for more paper

dimensions.

Portrait*

Landscape

Page orientation.

Orientation

Portrait refers to a vertical page; Landscape refers to a

horizontal page.

Most software applications override this setting. If

your application does not, the printer assumes the

default setting here.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

005 - 128

64* (Europe)

60* (USA)

Number of lines per page used in PCL.

Form Length

The Form Length setting is automatically adjusted

when the Paper Size (page 3-23) default is changed.

For example, if you set Paper Size to “A4

(210x297),” Form Length is adjusted to 64

automatically. If Paper Size is set to “Letter

(8.5x11),” Form Length is adjusted to 60.

Most software applications override this setting. If

your application does not, the printer assumes the

default setting here.

The Defaults setting (page 3-61) in the System Menu

determines whether the Form Length factory setting

is 64 or 60.

3-24 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Desktop

ISO L1

ISO L2

ISO L5

Collection of characters available for a font, including

uppercase and lowercase alphabets, punctuation

marks, and special characters such as open and close

quotation marks or international characters.

Symbol Set

ISO-4 UK

Most software applications override this setting. If

your application does not, the printer assumes the

default setting here.

ISO-6 ASCII

ISO-11 Swedish

ISO-15 Italian

ISO-17 Spanish

ISO-21 German

ISO-60 Norw. V1

ISO-69 French

Legal

When you change Symbol Set, the

settings for Font Number (page 3-20)

and Font Source (page 3-19) are reset to

Note

their factory settings automatically.

Math-8

Microsoft Publ.

PC-8

PC-8 DN

PC-8 Tk

PC-850

PC-852

Pi Font

PS Math

PS Text

Roman-8*

Ventura Int’l.

Ventura Math

Ventura US

Win 3.0

Win L1

Win L2

Win L5

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off*

Used to reserve memory for a full page of the selected

paper size.

Page Protection

A4 (210x297)

Legal (8.5x14)

Letter (8.5x11)

Ledger (11x17)

A3 (297x420)

When Off, memory is not reserved for an entire page.

It then becomes possible for a page to be too complex

to compose. The result is a Page Too Complexerror

message and the page may be printed on more than

one sheet of paper.

When set to a paper size, each page is composed into

reserved memory before the paper starts to move

through the printer. The printer may slow down

slightly with Page Protection; however, you will be

assured of printing a complex page on one sheet of

paper.

Page Protection can be overridden by software

when the Xerox printer driver is installed.

See Figure 2.3 (page 2-7)

for paper dimensions.

See “Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-69)

for further information.

Off*

Determines how the printer recovers from a paper

jam.

Jam Recovery

When On, the printer reprints any pages in the printer

at the time of the jam, after the jam has been cleared.

The printer does this by using a portion of memory to

store data.

When Off, some pages may be lost after the jam has

been cleared. The print job must be resent, specifying

those pages that did not print as a result of the paper

jam.

See “Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-69)

for further information.

3-26 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

300x300

Dots per inch (dpi).

Resolution

600x600*

400x400

800x800

Some software applications override this setting. If

your software application does not, the printer

assumes the default setting here.

Resolution can be overridden by software when the

Xerox printer driver is installed.

Higher resolutions use more printer memory. See

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-69) for

further information.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.8 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

When On, smooths the curves in characters and

graphics to reduce coarseness, thereby improving

image quality.

TrueRes

TrueRes can be overridden by software when the

Xerox printer driver is installed.

Off*

Reserves memory for saving permanently downloaded

fonts and macros, when the printer switches from

using the PCL printer language to using the PostScript

printer language, or when the printer steps down in

Page Protection or Resolution.

State Saving

When Off, all permanently downloaded fonts and

macros are cleared from memory when switching

PDLs. They must be downloaded again when the

printer switches back to PCL from PostScript.

When On, permanently downloaded fonts and

macros are stored in printer memory. You eliminate

the time to download them again when the printer

switches back to PCL.

Temporary fonts and macros are always

cleared at the end of every print job.

Note

State Saving requires 20 MB of memory if the

PostScript option is installed. If the PostScript option is

not installed, State Saving may be selected with 16

MB. This will prevent loss of downloaded PCL fonts

and macros if applications change the setting of

Resolution or Page Protection. Enabling State

Saving can have an effect on printing speed with

minimum memory installed. It is recommended that

this option not be enabled without 20 MB of printer

memory. See “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-69) for further information.

3-28 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

PostScript Menu options establish the PostScript

PostScript

conﬁguration for the printer. PostScript may be used by

software applications to send information and instructions to

the printer.

The 4520mp printer is factory-equipped with PostScript.

PostScript is available as an option for the 4520 printer. See

Appendix D: Ordering Information.

Note

Windows Users:

The Windows PostScript driver for the 4520 allows the user to

either download the PostScript header with every job or

download it only once. If the printer is used in a network or

other shared environment, where both PCL and PostScript

jobs are printed, the header will be deleted when the printer

switches from PostScript to PCL. Banner sheets printed from

Novell networks cause the printer to switch between

PostScript and PCL. If banner sheets are printed, insure that

the Language Sensing option is ON and the default language

is PCL. To avoid the loss of the PostScript header, select

“Download Each Job” in the PostScript driver. The “Already

Downloaded” option may be selected if at least 20 MB of

memory is installed in the printer and the State Saving option

is set to ON in the PostScript printer menu. The user is

required to download the header at least once for each power

on cycle. If several different PostScript applications are used,

the “Download Each Job” option will guarantee that the

correct header is always available.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Macintosh Users:

The Macintosh driver is installed by opening the driver disk

and double clicking the OnPAGE installer icon.

Note

Figure 3.9 (page 3-31) shows the PostScript Menu hierarchy,

which appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

PostScript Menu

Hierarchy

3-30 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.9 PostScript Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

Language

PCL Menu

Off*

Copies

1*- 99

Upper-Middle

Upper-Lower

Middle-Lower

Up-Mid-Low

HCEF-Upper^†

HCEF-Middle^†

HCEF-Lower^†

HCEF-Up-Mid^†

HCEF-Up-Low^†

HCEF-Mid-Low^†

HCEF-Up-Mid-Low^†

HCF-Upper^†

PostScript Menu

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Default Tray

Upper*

Middle

Lower

Manual

HCF or HCEF^†

Tray Switching

Note: The default for

Tray Switching is

Up-Mid-Low or

HCF-Up-Mid-Low

for ﬁrmware

releases < 4.06. The

default is Off (as

shown at right) for

releases 4.06 and

higher. To determine

the ﬁrmware release

of your printer, print a

Conﬁguration Sheet.

HCF-Middle^†

HCF-Lower^†

HCF-Up-Mid^†

HCF-Up-Low^†

HCF-Mid-Low^†

HCF-Up-Mid-Low^†

A3 (297x420)

Ledger (11x17)

B4 (250x352)

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)*

(USA)

Manual Size

Print Errors

Off*

A4 (210x297)*

(Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

Jam Recovery

Resolution

Off*

300x300

600x600*

400x400

800x800

TrueRes

Off

On*

State Saving

Off*

^†Appears only when the option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

PostScript Menu options and their settings are described in

Figure 3.10 (page 3-33). Factory settings are boldfaced,

followed by an asterisk (*). See “Setting a Menu Option”

(page 3-10) for the steps to ﬁnd and change a setting, or refer

to the Document Services for Printing Guide to use the RUI to

change settings.

PostScript Menu

Options

Default settings for certain PostScript Menu options may be

overridden from many software applications. If your software

application speciﬁes a value for an option below, the printer

PostScript Menu setting will be ignored:

•

Copies

Default Tray

Manual Size

Tray Switching

The Xerox printer driver allows your software application to

specify additional PostScript Menu options:

•

Resolution

TrueRes

Note

3-32 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.10 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Copies

Setting

Description

1* - 99

Number of times each page is printed.

Most software applications override this setting. If

your application does not, the printer assumes the

default setting here.

Upper*

Middle

Lower

Manual

HCF^†

Paper tray used if none is speciﬁed in your software

application.

Default Tray

HCEF^†

†

Appears only when the

option is installed.

Off

Sequence of trays the printer uses when printing a

page of a PostScript print job.

Tray Switching

Upper-Middle

Upper-Lower

Middle-Lower

Up-Mid-Low

Note: The default for Tray

Switching is Up-Mid-Low

or HCF-Up-Mid-Low for

ﬁrmware releases < 4.06.

The default is Off (as

shown at right) for releases

4.06 and higher. To

determine the ﬁrmware

release of your printer,

print a Conﬁguration

Sheet.

If the tray requested for the page is included in this

sequence then the whole sequence is used instead of

the requested tray, the ﬁrst tray used is the ﬁrst one in

the sequence, going from left to right, that satisﬁes all

page requirements. If the requested tray is not

included in this sequence then the requested tray

alone is used. For example if this setting is

“Upper-Lower” and the lower tray is requested then

the upper tray will be used ﬁrst provided that it

contains the requested size of paper.

HCEF-Upper^†

HCEF-Middle^†

HCEF-Lower^†

HCEF-Up-Mid^†

HCEF-Up-Low^†

HCEF-Mid-Low^†

HCEF-Up-Mid-Low^†

HCF-Upper^†

HCF-Middle^†

When this sequence is being used and the current tray

runs out of paper then the next tray in the sequence

that has the same size paper will be used.

HCF-Lower^†

HCF-Up-Mid^†

HCF-Up-Low^†

HCF-Mid-Low^†

HCF-Up-Mid-Low†

Settings that begin with HCEF only appear when a

High Capacity Envelope Feeder is installed.

Settings that begin with HCF only appear when a

High Capacity Feeder is installed.

The factory default is HCF-Up-Mid-Low when an HCF

is installed or Up-Mid-Low when an HCF is not

installed.

PostScript drivers other than the Xerox driver may

simply enable or disable Tray Switching; they can

not specify a setting.

†

Appears only when the

option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

The System Menu options set general printer features.

Figure 3.17 highlights the System Menu hierarchy.

System Menu

Hierarchy

Figure 3.17 System Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu^†

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Hex Dump

Chime

Off*

Off

Once*

Continuous

System Messages

Auto Continue

Defaults

Off

On*

Note: The System

Messages option (as

shown at right) is

available for ﬁrmware

releases < 4.06 only.

Off*

The Power Saver

option (as shown at

right) is available for

ﬁrmware releases 4.06

and higher.

Europe

USA

Disk Spooling^†

Power Saver

Off*

To determine the

ﬁrmware release of

your printer, print a

Conﬁguration Sheet.

15 min.

30 min.

60 min.*

90 min.

^†Appears only when the option is installed.

3-34 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.10 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

300x300

Dots per inch (dpi).

Resolution

600x600*

400x400

800x800

Some software applications override this setting. If

your software application does not, the printer

assumes the default setting here.

Resolution can be overridden by software when the

Xerox printer driver is installed.

Higher resolutions require more printer memory. See

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-69) for

further information.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.10 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

When On, smooths the curves in characters and

graphics to reduce coarseness, thereby improving

image quality.

TrueRes

TrueRes can be overridden by software when the

Xerox printer driver is installed.

3-36 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.10 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off*

Reserves memory for saving the contents of virtual

memory, when print jobs switch from PostScript to

the PCL printer language or when the printer steps

down in Page Protection or Resolution.

State Saving

When Off, if print jobs switch from PostScript to PCL,

the contents of virtual memory are cleared.^†

When On, State Saving saves virtual memory

contents, eliminating the time to download again

when switching back to PostScript.

State Saving requires 20 MB of memory if the

PostScript option is installed. If the PostScript option is

not installed, State Saving may be selected with 16

MB. This will prevent loss of downloaded PCL fonts

and macros if applications change the setting of

Resolution or Page Protection. Enabling State

Saving can have an effect on printing speed with

minimum memory installed. It is recommended that

this option not be enabled without 20 MB of printer

memory. See “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-69) for further information.

The contents of virtual memory will not

be saved if there is not enough free

memory.

Note

†

The Windows PostScript driver for the 4520 allows

the user to either download the PostScript header

with every job or download it only once. If the

printer is used in a network or other shared

environment, where both PCL and PostScript jobs are

printed, the header will be deleted when the printer

switches from PostScript to PCL. Banner sheets

printed from Novell networks cause the printer to

switch between PostScript and PCL. If banner sheets

are printed, insure that the Language Sensing option

is ON and the default language is PCL. To avoid the

loss of the PostScript header, select “Download Each

Job” in the PostScript driver. The “Already

Downloaded” option may be selected if at least 20

MB of memory is installed in the printer and the

State Saving option is set to ON in the PostScript

printer menu. The user is required to download the

header at least once for each power on cycle. If

several different PostScript applications are used, the

“Download Each Job” option will guarantee that the

correct header is always available.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

The Interface Menu contains submenus for the parallel and

serial ports on the printer as well as submenus for network

interface ports when a network option(s) is installed.

Interface

The Interface Menu may include submenus for the following:

•

Parallel Menu (See page 3-42.)

Serial Menu (See page 3-46.)

LocalTalk Menu (See page 3-51.)

Ethernet Menu (See page 3-52.)

Token Ring Menu (See page 3-55.)

Figure 3.11 (page 3-39) shows the Interface Menu hierarchy.

Interface Menu

Hierarchy

3-38 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.11 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu^†

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Parallel Menu

Port Enable

Off

On*

Port Timeout

5- 999 secs (30*)

System Language

PCL*

PostScript^†

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Bidirectional

Transfer Rate

Off

On*

Off

On*

Off*

High

Low*

^†Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.11 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings (continued)

Port Enable

Off

On*

Serial Menu

Port Timeout

5 - 999 secs (30*)

System Language

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Port Type

PCL*

PostScript^†

Off

On*

Off

On*

RS232*

RS422

Baud Rate

38400

19200

9600*

4800

2400

1200

600

300

Handshake

Robust XON*

XON

Hardware

DTR Polarity

Data Bits

Parity

High*

Low

None*

Even

Odd

Stop Bits

1.5

3-40 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.11 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings (continued)

LocalTalk Menu^‡

Ethernet Menu^‡

Port Timeout

5 - 999 secs (30*)

Port Timeout

PCL*

System Language

PostScript^†

Off

On*

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Frame Type

Note: The Frame Type

option (as shown at

right) is available for

ﬁrmware releases < 4.06

only. To determine the

ﬁrmware release of your

printer, print a

Off

On*

802.3*

Ethernet II

Conﬁguration Sheet.

Token Ring Menu^‡

5 - 999 secs (30*)

Port Timeout

PCL*

System Language

PostScript^†

Off

On*

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Off

On*

^†Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

‡ Appears only when the option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

The Parallel Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,

Figure 3.11 (page 3-39), contains options for conﬁguring the

printer’s bidirectional parallel port.

Parallel Menu

Options

Figure 3.12 describes each Parallel Menu option. Factory

settings are boldfaced and followed by an asterisk (*). See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps to ﬁnd and

change a setting, or refer to the Document Services for

Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.

Figure 3.12 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

Activation of the parallel port.

Port Enable

When On, the parallel port is enabled so that the

printer can receive print jobs through it.

The parallel port becomes part of a port polling

sequence that includes all ports. See Appendix C: I/O

Port Polling for information.

When Off, the port is disabled so no communication

occurs through this port with the host. If you are not

using the parallel port, you can set Port Enable Off.

5-999 secs (30*)

Time interval for determining when to end an

incomplete print job and poll the next port in the

polling sequence.

Port Timeout

Port Timeout works in conjunction with Auto Job

End (page 3-44).

See Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for more

information.

PCL*

Page description language (PDL) the printer will use

for print jobs coming through the parallel port.

System Language

PostScript^†

†

Appears only when the

PostScript option is

installed.

When Lang. Sensing (page 3-43) is On, System

Language is used only when the printer cannot

detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.

3-42 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.12 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

Automatic recognition of the page description

language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.

Lang. Sensing

When On, if the parallel port receives print jobs of

different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed

by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which

PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the

incoming data stream, then switching to the

perceived language for that job or to the System

Language setting if it fails to sense the language.

When On, if State Saving (page 3-28) in the PCL

Menu or State Saving (page 3-37) in the PostScript

Menu is also On, the permanently downloaded fonts

and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time

to download them again when switching between

PDLs occurs.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.12 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

Automatic ending of a print job that does not ﬁnish.

Auto Job End

When On, after the current print job has paused long

enough to exceed the Port Timeout (page 3-42)

interval and no data has been received on any other

port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is

ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared

from memory.

Use Auto Job End On when the printer serves

multiple users on a network. This assures that one

user’s print job will ﬁnish and all pages will exit the

printer whether or not another user sends a print job.

No partial pages will be left unprinted.

When Off, the print job does not end after the

timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue

until another print job is received on any port. A

partial page will remain unprinted until the next print

job is received. See Form Feed

(page 3-5) for

information on ejecting partial pages.

Auto Job End should be On if the printer

is on a network.

Note

If you are not sharing the printer with other users and

if you ﬁnd that one page is split and printed on

multiple pages, set Auto Job End Off or increase the

Port Timeout interval. It could be the Port Timeout

is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.

Also see “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-69) for other ways to correct the problem of

one page printing on multiple pages.

With the Hard Disk option installed and

Disk Spooling On, Auto Job End is always

on (regardless of setting).

Note

3-44 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.12 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off*

Activation of two-way communications between the

printer and your computer.

Bidirectional

Bidirectional On enables the printer to send

messages to your computer.

Only set Bidirectional On if you have a

software application that supports it.

Caution

High

Low*

Relative speed of the port.

Transfer Rate

The High setting will free up the host more quickly for

other processing. If your computer cannot handle the

high speed, data may be lost.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

The Serial Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,

Figure 3.11 (page 3-39), contains options for conﬁguring the

printer’s serial port.

Serial Menu

Options

Figure 3.13 describes each Serial Menu option. Factory

settings are boldfaced and followed by an asterisk (*). See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps to ﬁnd and

change a setting, or refer to the Document Services for

Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.

Figure 3.13 Serial Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

Activation of the serial port.

Port Enable

When On, the serial port is enabled so that the printer

can receive print jobs through it.

The serial port becomes part of a port polling

sequence that includes all ports. See Appendix C: I/O

Port Polling for information.

When Off, the port is disabled so no communication

occurs through this port with the host. If you are not

using the serial port, you can set Port Enable Off.

5-999 secs (30*)

Time interval for determining when to end an

incomplete print job and poll the next port in the

polling sequence.

Port Timeout

Port Timeout works in conjunction with Auto Job

End (page 3-48).

See Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for more

information.

PCL*

Page description language (PDL) the printer will use

for print jobs coming through the serial port.

System Language

PostScript^†

†

Appears only when the

PostScript option is

installed.

When Lang. Sensing (page 3-47) is On, System

Language is used only when the printer cannot

detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.

3-46 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.13 Serial Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

Automatic recognition of the page description

language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.

Lang. Sensing

When On, if the serial port receives print jobs of

different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed

by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which

PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the

incoming data stream, then switching to the

perceived language for that job or to the System

Language setting if it fails to sense the language.

When On, if State Saving (page 3-28) in the PCL

Menu or State Saving (page 3-37) in the PostScript

Menu is also On, the permanently downloaded fonts

and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time

to download them again when switching between

PDLs occurs.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.13 Serial Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

Automatic ending of a print job that does not ﬁnish.

Auto Job End

When On, after the current print job has paused long

enough to exceed the Port Timeout (page 3-46)

interval and no data has been received on any other

port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is

ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared

from memory.

Use Auto Job End On when the printer serves

multiple users on a network. This assures that one

user’s print job will ﬁnish and all pages will exit the

printer whether or not another user sends a print job.

No partial pages will be left unprinted.

When Off, the print job does not end after the

timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue

until another print job is received on any port. A

partial page will remain unprinted until the next print

job is received. See Form Feed

(page 3-5) for

information on ejecting partial pages.

Auto Job End should be On if the printer

is on a network.

Note

If you are not sharing the printer with other users and

if you ﬁnd that one page is split and printed on

multiple pages, set Auto Job End Off or increase the

Port Timeout interval. It could be the Port Timeout

is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.

Also see “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-69) for other ways to correct the problem of

one page printing on multiple pages.

With the Hard Disk option installed and

Disk Spooling On, Auto Job End is always

on (regardless of setting).

Note

3-48 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.13 Serial Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

RS232*

RS422

Serial interface standard.

Port Type

38400

19200

9600*

4800

2400

1200

600

Speed at which data is transferred.

Baud Rate

Baud rate translates approximately to bits per

second.

The serial port Baud Rate setting must

match the host computer baud rate

300

setting.

Note

Your software application may set the

baud rate. If not, use the DOS MODE

command to modify the baud rate on

the host computer. Refer to your DOS

documentation for more information.

Robust XON*

XON

Hardware

Data ﬂow control. (Flow control, also known as

handshaking, is the cooperation between the host

computer and printer for data transfer. XON signals

the host computer to send more data. XOFF is the

converse signal that tells the host computer to stop

and wait.)

Handshake

Robust XON sends the XON signal continuously.

Robust XON helps ensure that handshaking works

with a host computer that fails to receive the XON

signal.

XON sends the signal only once.

Hardware is used when the host computer cannot

operate in XON/XOFF handshaking mode. Hardware

requires a cable with the DTR (Data Terminal

Ready) pin connection enabled.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.13 Serial Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

High*

Low

Serial port’s DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal sent

from the printer to notify the host computer that it is

ready to receive data.

DTR Polarity

High is standard for most computers; it uses true logic

(+5 V).

Low is typically used on nonstandard equipment; it

uses inverted logic (0 V).

Number of data bits in a character.

Data Bits

The Data Bits setting must match the

host computer data bits setting.

Note

None*

Even

Odd

How the parity bit is used in error checking.

Parity

The parity bit may be checked against the received

character by means of an Even or Odd error checking

mechanism.

The Parity setting must match the host

computer parity setting.

Note

1.5

Number of stop bits in each character. (Stop bits

signal the end of a character.)

Stop Bits

The Stop Bits setting must match the

host computer stop bits setting.

Note

3-50 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

The LocalTalk Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,

Figure 3.11 (page 3-39), contains a single option for

conﬁguring the printer’s LocalTalk port, when the LocalTalk

option has been installed.

LocalTalk Menu

Option

The LocalTalk option supports AppleTalk protocols. For

detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to

Networking: LocalTalk packaged with the LocalTalk option.

Figure 3.14 describes the option. The factory setting is

boldfaced and followed by an asterisk (*). See “Setting a

Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps to ﬁnd and change

the setting.

Figure 3.14 LocalTalk Menu option showing factory setting

Option

Setting

Description

5-999 secs (30*)

Time interval for determining when to poll the next

port in the polling sequence, after the LocalTalk port

has been inactive for this amount of time.

Port Timeout

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

The Ethernet Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,

Figure 3.11 (page 3-39), contains options for conﬁguring the

printer’s Ethernet port, when the Ethernet option has been

installed.

Ethernet Menu

Options

The 4520mp printer is factory equipped with the Ethernet

option.

Ethernet is available as an option for the 4520 printer. See

Note

Appendix D: Ordering Information.

The Ethernet option supports the following protocols:

•

Novell NetWare, Version 2.x and 3.x

TCP/IP

EtherTalk

DEC LAT

Microsoft LAN Manager

For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to

Networking: Ethernet packaged with the 4520mp printer or

with the Ethernet option kit.

Figure 3.15 (page 3-53) describes each Ethernet Menu

option. Factory settings are boldfaced and followed by an

asterisk (*). See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the

steps to ﬁnd and change a setting, or refer to the Document

Services for Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.

3-52 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.15 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Setting

Description

5-999 secs (30*)

Time interval for determining when to end an

incomplete print job and poll the next port in the

polling sequence.

Port Timeout

Port Timeout works in conjunction with Auto Job

End (page 3-54).

See Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for more

information.

PCL*

Page description language (PDL) the printer will use

for print jobs coming through the Ethernet port.

System Language

Lang. Sensing

PostScript^†

†

Appears only when the

PostScript option is

installed.

When Lang. Sensing (page 3-53) is On, System

Language is used only when the printer cannot

detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.

Off

On*

Automatic recognition of the page description

language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.

When On, if the Ethernet port receives print jobs of

different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed

by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which

PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the

incoming data stream, then switching to the

perceived language for that job or to the System

Language setting if it fails to sense the language.

When On, if State Saving (page 3-28) in the PCL

Menu or State Saving (page 3-37) in the PostScript

Menu is also On, the permanently downloaded fonts

and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time

to download them again when switching occurs

between PDLs.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.15 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

Automatic ending of a print job that does not ﬁnish.

Auto Job End

When On, after the current print job has paused long

enough to exceed the Port Timeout (page 3-51)

interval and no data has been received on any other

port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is

ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared

from memory.

Use Auto Job End On when the printer serves

multiple users on a network. This assures that one

user’s print job will ﬁnish and all pages will exit the

printer whether or not another user sends a print job.

No partial pages will be left unprinted.

When Off, the print job does not end after the

timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue

until another print job is received on any port. A

partial page will remain unprinted until the next print

job is received. See Form Feed

(page 3-5) for

information on ejecting partial pages.

Auto Job End should be On if the printer

is on a network.

Note

If you are not sharing the printer with other users and

if you ﬁnd that one page is split and printed on

multiple pages, set Auto Job End Off or increase the

Port Timeout interval. It could be the Port Timeout

is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.

Also see “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-69) for other ways to correct the problem of

one page printing on multiple pages.

802.3*

Ethernet II

Protocol standard frame type.

Frame Type

Refer to your network software documentation for

the correct frame type.

Note: This option is

available for ﬁrmware

releases < 4.06 only. To

determine the ﬁrmware

release of your printer,

print a Conﬁguration

Sheet.

3-54 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

The Token Ring Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,

Figure 3.11 (page 3-39), contains options for conﬁguring the

printer’s Token Ring port, when the Token Ring option has

been installed.

Token Ring

Menu Options

The Token Ring option supports the following protocols:

•

Novell NetWare, Version 2.x and 3.x

Microsoft LAN Manager

For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to

Networking: Token Ring packaged with the Token Ring

option kit.

Figure 3.16 (page 3-56) describes each Token Ring Menu

option. Factory settings are boldfaced and followed by an

asterisk (*). See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the

steps to ﬁnd and change a setting, or refer to the Document

Services for Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.16 Token Ring Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Setting

Description

5-999 secs (30*)

Time interval for determining when to end an

incomplete print job and poll the next port in the

polling sequence.

Port Timeout

Port Timeout works in conjunction with Auto Job

End (page 3-58).

See Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for more information

on how port polling works.

PCL*

Page description language (PDL) the printer will use

for print jobs coming through the Token Ring port.

System Language

PostScript^†

†

Appears only when the

PostScript option is

installed.

When Lang. Sensing (page 3-57) is On, System

Language is used only when the printer cannot

detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.

3-56 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.16 Token Ring Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

Automatic recognition of the page description

language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.

Lang. Sensing

When On, if the Token Ring port receives print jobs of

different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed

by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which

PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the

incoming data stream, then switching to the

perceived language for that job or to the System

Language setting if it fails to sense the language.

When On, if State Saving (page 3-28) in the PCL

Menu or State Saving (page 3-37) in the PostScript

Menu is also On, the permanently downloaded fonts

and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time

to download them again when switching between

PDLs occurs.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.16 Token Ring Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off

On*

Automatic ending of a print job that does not ﬁnish.

Auto Job End

When On, after the current print job has paused long

enough to exceed the Port Timeout (page 3-56)

interval and no data has been received on any other

port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is

ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared

from memory.

Use Auto Job End On when the printer serves

multiple users on a network. This assures that one

user’s print job will ﬁnish and all pages will exit the

printer whether or not another user sends a print job.

No partial pages will be left unprinted.

When Off, the print job does not end after the

timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue

until another print job is received on any port. A

partial page will remain unprinted until the next print

job is received. See Form Feed

(page 3-5) for

information on ejecting partial pages.

Auto Job End should be On if the printer

is on a network.

Note

If you are not sharing the printer with other users and

if you ﬁnd that one page is split and printed on

multiple pages, set Auto Job End Off or increase the

Port Timeout interval. It could be the Port Timeout

is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.

Also see “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-69) for other ways to correct the problem of

one page printing on multiple pages.

3-58 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S y s t e m M e n u

The System Menu options set general printer features.

System Menu

Figure 3.17 highlights the System Menu hierarchy.

System Menu

Hierarchy

Figure 3.17 System Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu^†

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Hex Dump

Chime

Off*

Off

Once*

Continuous

System Messages

Auto Continue

Defaults

Off

On*

Note: The System

Messages option (as

shown at right) is

available for ﬁrmware

releases < 4.06 only.

Off*

The Power Saver

option (as shown at

right) is available for

ﬁrmware releases 4.06

and higher.

Europe

USA

Disk Spooling^†

Power Saver

Off*

To determine the

ﬁrmware release of

your printer, print a

Conﬁguration Sheet.

15 min.

30 min.

60 min.*

90 min.

^†Appears only when the option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S y s t e m M e n u

In Figure 3.18, System Menu options and their settings are

described. Factory settings are boldfaced, followed by an

asterisk (*). See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the

steps to ﬁnd and change a setting, or refer to the Document

Services for Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.

System Menu

Options

Figure 3.18 System Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Setting

Description

Off*

Print output as hexadecimal codes instead of normal

print data.

Hex Dump

When Off, data is printed normally.

When On, Hex Dump is used for error checking and

error analysis.

When Hex Dump is On, the Control Panel

menus are not available.

Note

Off

Once*

Continuous

Audible chime signal for attention.

Chime

When Once, the printer sounds one audible chime

when needing attention.

When Continuous, the printer sounds frequent

audible chimes when needing attention.

When Off, no chime sound is produced.

Off

On*

Display of system error messages.

System Messages

When On, system error messages are displayed.

When Off, no system messages are displayed.

Note: This option is

available for ﬁrmware

releases < 4.06 only. To

determine the ﬁrmware

release of your printer,

print a Conﬁguration

Sheet.

3-60 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S y s t e m M e n u

Figure 3.18 System Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Off*

Control of the resumption of printing after system

errors occur.

Auto Continue

Certain errors may occur that halt printer operations.

Two examples are:

Out of Memory

and

Page Too Complex.

When Auto Continue is Off, the printer does not

automatically resume. Enter

must be pressed

before normal printer operations can continue.

When Auto Continue is On, the printer automatically

resumes operation after certain system errors if

Enter

is not pressed within ten seconds. The

On setting is useful in a networked environment.

Europe

USA

Control of default paper size settings in various

menus.

Defaults

There is no standard factory-set default for this

option; the default varies by world region.

When Europe, all paper size-related options are set to

A4 (210x297) and Form Length is set to 64.

When USA, all paper size-related options are set to

Letter (8.5x11) and Form Length is set to 60.

The Conﬁg. Sheet (page 3-64) is printed at Defaults

size, regardless of actual paper size.

Perform a Reset Menus (page 3-68) after

changing Defaults.

Note

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S y s t e m M e n u

Figure 3.18 System Menu options showing factory settings (continued)

Option

Setting

Description

Disk Spooling^†

Off*

Use of hard disk (if installed) for spooling of print jobs.

When On, data received and waiting to be processed

from the parallel or serial ports is spooled onto the

hard disk and later retrieved for processing.

When Off, data received and waiting to be processed

is kept in printer memory. Set Disk Spooling to Off to

save time if spooling is already done outside the

printer.

†

Appears only when the

hard disk option is

installed.

15 min.

30 min.

60 min.*

The Xerox 4520/4520mp printers conform to EPA

Energy Star guidelines. The printer will enter a low

power state after 60 minutes of inactivity. This

timeout is adjustable to 15, 30, 60 or 90 minutes via

this option.

Power Saver

Note: This option is only

available for ﬁrmware

releases 4.06 and higher.

To determine the ﬁrmware

release of your printer,

print a Conﬁguration

Sheet.

90 min.

When in the low power state, the printer displays

Power Saver On on the Control Panel. When a

print job is received while in the power saver mode,

the printer may require up to 30 seconds of warm up

time before the ﬁrst sheet is fed from the input tray.

3-62 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T e s t M e n u

Test Menu options are functions that provide output to help

Test Menu

you maintain high quality printing.

Options in the Test Menu are functions to be performed by

the printer rather than settings. There are no submenus.

Note

Figure 3.19 shows the Test Menu hierarchy.

Test Menu

Hierarchy

Figure 3.19 Test Menu hierarchy

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu^†

Interface Menu

System Menu

Note: The Demo Page

option (as shown at

right) is only available

for ﬁrmware releases

4.06 and higher. To

determine the

ﬁrmware release of

your printer, print a

Conﬁguration Sheet.

Test Menu

Conﬁg. Sheet

Demo Page

PCL Font List

PS Font List^†

Test Print

Memory Check

^†Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T e s t M e n u

Figure 3.20 describes each Test Menu function. See “Setting

a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps in performing a Test

Menu function.

Test Menu

Functions

Figure 3.20 Test Menu functions

Function

Description

Conﬁguration Sheet to show the printer’s current information and menu settings.

The Conﬁguration Sheet contains a variety of information such as:

Conﬁg. Sheet

• Number of sheets printed to date.

• Total printer memory (RAM) available.

• Firmware versions for the printer controller and print engine.

• Firmware versions for Ethernet, LocalTalk, and Token Ring, when installed.

• PostScript revision level, when installed.

• Current menu settings.

• Hard disk statistics, when installed.

• Information on all installed options including the MBF, HCF, and HCEF.

The Conﬁguration Sheet is printed from the Default Source (page 3-21) at the

current Resolution (page 3-27) setting, both speciﬁed in the PCL Menu, using A4

(210x297) paper if the System Menu setting for Defaults (page 3-61) is Europe, or

using Letter (8.5x11) paper if Defaults is USA.

Conﬁg. Sheet will cause a printer reset.

Demo Page listing Connectivity, Paper Handling, Print Quality and Page Description

Languages of the printer.

Demo Page

Note: This option is only

available for ﬁrmware

releases 4.06 and higher.

To determine the ﬁrmware

release of your printer,

print a Conﬁguration

Sheet.

The Demo Page is printed from the Default Source (page 3-21), speciﬁed in the

PCL Menu, at 600 dpi using A4 (210x297) paper if the System Menu setting for

Defaults (page 3-61) is Europe, or using Letter (8.5x11) paper if Defaults is USA.

Demo Page will cause a printer reset.

3-64 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T e s t M e n u

Figure 3.20 Test Menu functions (continued)

Function

Description

Complete list of all PCL fonts currently available in the printer.

PCL Font List

PCL fonts include those that are internal, on font card(s), and permanently

downloaded soft fonts. See Font Source (page 3-19) for font storage locations.

The PCL Font List prints font number, typeface name, whether the font is ﬁxed

pitch or proportionally spaced, point size or scalable indication, orientation, other

font characteristics, and a font sample.

Printing a PCL Font List will cause a printer reset, ejecting any partial pages and

clearing any incomplete jobs, temporary fonts, and macros from memory.

The Font Number (page 3-20) may change based on what fonts you

have loaded and what Symbol Set (page 3-25) you are using.

Note

Complete list of the 35 PostScript language typefaces.

PS Font List

With PostScript installed, the PS Font List shows all resident PostScript fonts

available in the printer, as well as a sample of each.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T e s t M e n u

Figure 3.20 Test Menu functions (continued)

Function

Description

“Test pattern” for analysis of print quality over the entire page; intended for use by

service technician.

Test Print

The number of Test Prints produced is determined by Copies (page 3-19) and

printed from the Default Source (page 3-21), both speciﬁed in the PCL Menu. If

the System menu setting Defaults (page 3-61) is USA, Letter (8.5x11) paper is

used; otherwise, A4 paper is used.

Test Print will cause a printer reset, clearing any incomplete jobs.

Complete check of printer memory (resident and any SIMMs installed) and a

reporting of the results on the Control Panel display.

Memory Check

Memory Check is more extensive than the check performed when the printer is

powered on. When you invoke Memory Check, you will see:

Memory Check

Please Wait....

Before Memory Check, any partial pages are ejected and any incomplete print

jobs, permanently downloaded fonts, and macros are cleared from memory. After

Memory Check is ﬁnished, it reboots the printer to its power-on state.

If a problem occurs, the Control Panel will display a numeric diagnostic code. See

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting, “Displayed Control Panel Messages” (page 7-5), to

locate the diagnostic message associated with the numeric code.

3-66 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e s e t M e n u

The Reset Menu offers several functions to reset various

Reset Menu

printer functions.

Options in the Reset Menu are functions to be performed by

the printer rather than settings. There are no submenus.

Note

Figure 3.21 shows the Reset Menu hierarchy.

Reset Menu

Hierarchy

Figure 3.21 Reset Menu hierarchy

Reset Printer

†

Appears only when the

Reset Menus

PostScript option is installed.

Reset

Reset All

Cancel PS Job^†

Figure 3.22 (page 3-68) describes each Reset Menu function.

See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps in

performing a Reset Menu function.

Reset Menu

Functions

For all types of reset, the printer clears any temporarily

downloaded fonts and print macros from memory, as well as

ejects any partially printed pages.

Note

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e s e t M e n u

Figure 3.22 Reset Menu functions

Functions

Description

Reset of the printer’s PCL and PostScript printer languages to their power-on state.

Reset Printer

Reset Printer is useful when you have printing problems. First, cancel the print job

from the host. Second, invoke Reset Printer.

Reset Printer cancels any print jobs being processed and clears all temporary

fonts and macros.

Reset Printer does not change the menu settings of any network

option. However, any current print jobs being processed by a

network option will be discarded.

Note

Reset of menus to their factory settings.

Reset Menus

Reset Menus does not affect the Language setting (page 3-14) or the System

Menu Defaults setting (page 3-61).

The printer remains ofﬂine, so you can work with other menus.

To insure proper operation of this feature, cycle the printer (turn

the printer off/on) before invoking Reset Menus.

Note

All reset functions are performed:

Reset All

• Reset Printer

• Reset Menus

To insure proper operation of this feature, cycle the printer (turn

the printer off/on) before invoking Reset All.

Note

Cancellation of the current PostScript job.

Cancel PS Job

This function appears only if the PostScript option is installed.

The PostScript job is ﬂushed from memory—the entire print job is discarded.

Cancel PS Job is useful when a fault in your software application causes a

PostScript error. For example, a PostScript programming error could cause an

inﬁnite loop which Cancel PS Job would exit.

3-68 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y

Certain PCL Menu and PostScript Menu options affect the

printer’s performance and memory usage, as described in

“PCL Menu” (page 3-15) and “PostScript Menu” (page 3-29).

Printer

Settings that

Affect

Figure 3.23 provides more detailed information on these

options.

Memory

Figure 3.23 PCL and PostScript Menu options that affect performance and memory usage

Option

Description

When a page is particularly complex with graphics or dense text, the printer

may not be able to process it rapidly enough to keep up with normal

printing operations. Data may be lost or one page may be split on multiple

pages.

Page Protection

PCL Menu (page 3-26)

Page protection is a technique that reserves memory to ensure the entire

page can be created and printed before the actual printing process. The

tradeoff in performance is matched by the certainty that an entire complex

page may be printed.

Page Protection is related to Resolution (page 3-27 for PCL, page 3-35

for PostScript, and page 3-70) since the amount of memory needed for a

page depends on its resolution. The higher the resolution, the more

memory needed. See Figure 3.24 (page 3-72) for memory requirements.

Your software application may change the Page Protection level (e.g.,

from Legal to Letter). When that occurs, the printer’s memory is

reconﬁgured. Downloaded fonts and macros may be cleared from memory

unless State Saving (page 3-28 for PCL, page 3-37 for PostScript, and

page 3-71) is set.

If any request for memory cannot be satisﬁed, you will be notiﬁed on the

Control Panel.

If you frequently see the following error message

Page Too Complex

you may want to set Page Protection to be able to print the entire page.

Otherwise, if you do not see frequent warning messages, set Page

Protection Off.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y

Figure 3.23 PCL and PostScript Menu options that affect performance and memory usage

Option

Description

A paper jam may cause a page image being printed to become lost. When

Jam Recovery is On, the printer will automatically reprint the image of the

jammed page, after the jam has been cleared.

Jam Recovery

PCL Menu (page 3-26)

PostScript Menu (page 3-34)

Because the printer holds a page image in memory longer with Jam

Recovery, if a low memory condition occurs there can be a slight

performance impact and the printer may require more memory. If sufﬁcient

memory exists, Jam Recovery has no impact.

The printer prints at 800, 600, 400, or 300 dpi. The factory-set default is

600 dpi.

Resolution

PCL Menu (page 3-27)

Your software application may be able to set Resolution and override the

setting here. Whether a new Resolution is set by your application or on

the Control Panel, the new Resolution becomes effective with the next

print job or with a printer reset. Unless State Saving (page 3-28 for PCL,

page 3-37 for PostScript, and page 3-71) is On, downloaded fonts and

macros may be cleared from memory.

PostScript Menu (page 3-35)

The higher the resolution, the more memory required. See Figure 3.24

(page 3-72) for memory requirements.

3-70 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y

Figure 3.23 PCL and PostScript Menu options that affect performance and memory usage

Option

Description

When State Saving is Off, fonts and printer macros downloaded from

your software application are cleared from memory when:

State Saving

PCL Menu (page 3-28)

• The printer switches from one page description language (PDL) to

another (such as from PostScript to PCL).

PostScript Menu (page 3-37)

• A memory reconﬁguration takes place (such as for a new Page

Protection or Resolution setting).

When State Saving is On, the printer reserves memory to retain the

downloaded fonts and macros. Thus, the fonts and macros do not have to

be downloaded to memory again when switching PDLs or reconﬁguring

memory.

You may set State Saving separately for the PCL and the PostScript

environments.

The Windows PostScript driver for the 4520 allows the user to either

download the PostScript header with every job or download it only once. If

the printer is used in a network or other shared environment, where both

PCL and PostScript jobs are printed, the header will be deleted when the

printer switches from PostScript to PCL. Banner sheets printed from Novell

networks cause the printer to switch between PostScript and PCL. If banner

sheets are printed, insure that the Language Sensing option is ON and

the default language is PCL. To avoid the loss of the PostScript header,

select “Download Each Job” in the PostScript driver. The “Already

Downloaded” option may be selected if at least 20 MB of memory is

installed in the printer and the State Saving option is set to ON in the

PostScript printer menu. The user is required to download the header at

least once for each power on cycle. If several different PostScript

applications are used, the “Download Each Job” option will guarantee that

the correct header is always available. See Figure 3.24 (page 3-72) for

memory requirements.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

❖

3-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y

The memory requirements shown in Figure 3.24 provide for

Minimum Memory

Requirements

optimal memory usage and printer performance.

If you encounter memory warning messages, try different

combinations of Resolution and Page Protection before

purchasing additional memory.

Note

Figure 3.24 Minimum memory requirements

Setting

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

800 dpi

PCL

All paper sizes: 4 MB All paper sizes: 4 MB All paper sizes: 4 MB

Not recommended

with Page

Protection Off

PCL

with Page

Protection set

All paper sizes: 4 MB All paper sizes: 4 MB

All paper sizes: 8 MB All paper sizes: 8 MB

A3/Ledger: 12 MB

All others: 8 MB

A3/Ledger: 16 MB

Legal: 12 MB

All others: 8 MB

PostScript

(and PCL)

with State

Saving Off

A3/Ledger: 12 MB

All others: 8 MB

A3/Ledger: 20 MB

All others: 12 MB

PCL with State

Saving On

16 MB

20 MB

16 MB

20 MB

16 MB

20 MB

16 MB

20 MB

PostScript with

State Saving

If both the PostScript and hard disk options are installed in

the printer, the memory requirements for PCL with Page

Protection set are: 800 dpi Ledger/A3 require 20 MB; all

other sizes require 12 MB.

Note

3-72 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4

Using Fonts

retpahC

Overview ............................................................................... 4-2

Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts 4-2

Where Fonts Reside 4-3

Fonts Resident on the Printer .............................................. 4-4

TrueType Fonts 4-5

Intellifont Fonts 4-6

PCL Bitmap Font 4-7

Adding Fonts ......................................................................... 4-8

PostScript 4-8

Font Cards 4-9

Fonts within Software Applications 4-10

Selecting a Font .................................................................. 4-11

Downloading Fonts ............................................................ 4-12

Temporary and Permanent Fonts 4-13

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

❖

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

A font is a collection of characters of one typeface, one

weight, and one posture. An example is Courier New Italic. A

font generally contains uppercase and lowercase alphabets,

numbers, and special characters such as punctuation marks.

Overview

A font family is composed of one typeface in all its available

weights and postures. Courier New, for example, has

medium, italic, bold, and bold italic.

Fonts are normally categorized according to the manner in

which they are generated:

Bitmapped and

Scalable Fonts

•

Bitmapped font

A bitmapped font contains digitized images of each

character in the font. Each symbol (that is, character,

number, or punctuation mark) is a complete image in

digitized form.

Each symbol is stored as a bitmap (or raster) that

represents the black or white parts of the symbol. The

bitmaps are copied onto the paper when printing takes

place.

•

Scalable font

A scalable font contains characters described by

mathematical formulae that produce character outlines.

A mathematical formula describes a line between two

points which constitutes one line of the character’s

outline. The images printed on paper are digitized as the

page is being printed. During digitization, the image may

be scaled, sloped, or rotated.

There exists a variety of mathematical models used to

construct scalable fonts, but the two most popular are

Bézier and B-spline.

Scalable fonts are also known as contour or outline fonts.

4-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

At one time, computers used bitmapped fonts only. One set of

bitmapped fonts was needed to display characters on a

terminal screen, and another set was needed for printing.

These were called screen fonts and printer fonts,

respectively.

Today, software applications use many scalable fonts because

they can be used for both screen and printer.

Where Fonts

Reside

Screen fonts are always stored on the host computer, not the

printer.

Printer fonts may reside in three places:

•

Printer ROM holds resident fonts, installed at the factory

on memory chips on the printer controller board. See

“Fonts Resident on the Printer” (page 4-4) for a complete

list.

A font card inserted into the printer holds additional PCL

fonts. The 4520/4520mp printers provide two slots for font

cards. See Chapter 1: Introduction (page 1-3) for font card

location.

Software applications contain additional fonts that may

be downloaded to printer memory or the hard disk, in

some cases, for the entire time the printer is turned on.

See “Downloading Fonts” (page 4-12) for more

information.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

❖

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r

The 4520/4520mp printers are equipped with resident fonts

Fonts

Resident on

the Printer

installed at the factory on memory chips on the printer

controller board.

Resident fonts are used by software applications that

communicate with the printer in PCL (Printer Command

Language). See Appendix B: Printer Commands (Escape

Sequences) for more information on all PCL commands.

The 4520mp printer is factory-equipped with the PostScript

option that makes available 35 PostScript fonts. To review the

PostScript fonts, print a PS Font List (page 3-65). Also, refer to

your PostScript reference documentation.

Note

Resident fonts available to PCL include the following:

•

10 TrueType fonts. See “TrueType Fonts” (page 4-5).

35 Intellifont fonts. See “Intellifont Fonts” (page 4-6).

1 PCL Bitmap font. See “PCL Bitmap Font” (page 4-7).

4-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r

TrueType fonts are used by Microsoft Windows 3.1 or later

and may be printed to both PostScript and non-PostScript

printers.

TrueType

Fonts

The ten resident TrueType fonts are:

Arial

Arial Bold

Arial Bold Italic

Arial Italic

Symbol

Times New Roman

Times New Roman Bold

Times New Roman Bold Italic

Times New Roman Italic

Wingdings

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

❖

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r

Intellifont is a scalable font format. The printers are fully

Intellifont

Fonts

compatible with this font format and provide the 35 resident

Intellifont fonts:

Antique Olive Medium

Antique Olive Italic

Antique Olive Bold

Albertus Medium

Albertus Extra Bold

CG Omega Medium

CG Omega Italic

CG Omega Bold

Garamond Antiqua

Garamond Kursiv

Garamond Halbfett

Garamond Kursiv Halbfett

Letter Gothic Medium

Letter Gothic Italic

Letter Gothic Bold

Marigold Medium

Univers Medium

CG Omega Bold Italic

CG Times Medium

CG Times Italic

Univers Italic

Univers Bold

CG Times Bold

Univers Bold Italic

Univers Cond. Medium

Univers Cond. Italic

Univers Cond. Bold

Univers Cond. Bold Italic

CG Times Bold Italic

Clarendon Cond. Bold

Coronet Medium Italic

Courier Medium

Courier Italic

Courier Bold

Courier Bold Italic

4-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r

The printers have one resident bitmap font called Line

Printer. It comes in only one typeface, weight, and posture.

PCL Bitmap

Font

The Line Printer font may be used to provide:

•

Line printer emulation for a print job.

Backward compatibility for those applications that make

use of the line printer font.

To review the PCL fonts in your printer, print a PCL Font List

(page 3-65).

Note

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

❖

4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d d i n g F o n t s

Utilizing fonts in addition to resident fonts can add new

dimensions to your work. Additional fonts are available

through the:

Adding Fonts

•

PostScript option. See “PostScript” (page 4-8).

Font cards for PCL fonts. See “Font Cards” (page 4-9).

Software applications. See “Fonts within Software

Applications” (page 4-10).

Thirty-ﬁve PostScript fonts (Adobe Type 1) are available to

your printer, either factory-installed on the 4520mp printer, or

user-installable on the 4520 printer as an option. See

Appendix D: Ordering Information for more information on

the PostScript option.

PostScript

Many additional PostScript fonts are available through Adobe

Systems, Inc. and may be used when the PostScript option is

installed on your printer.

If you have a 4520mp printer, see “PostScript Menu”

(page 3-29) for PostScript printer settings.

PostScript fonts are used by the PostScript Level 2 printer

language. If you plan to program in the PostScript Level 2

printer language, refer to Adobe Systems, Inc. PostScript

language reference documentation.

The Lang. Sensing settings in the Parallel (page 3-42), Serial

(page 3-46), Ethernet (page 3-52), and Token Ring (page 3-55)

Menus enable automatic switching between the PostScript

and PCL printer languages. PostScript and PCL fonts are not

interchangeable.

Note

4-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d d i n g F o n t s

The 4520/4520mp printers are equipped with two font card

slots. See Chapter 1: Introduction (page 1-3) for the physical

location of the slots. See Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options

for font card installation.

Font Cards

Font cards for the 4520/4520mp contain PCL fonts only. In

addition, font cards may contain one or more scalable fonts or

bitmapped fonts. However, bitmapped and scalable fonts are

not mixed on the same card.

A font card may contain its own default font. In this case, its

default font becomes the printer’s default font. To change the

default font, see Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, Font

Source (page 3-19).

To avoid problems when inserting or removing a font card,

take the printer ofﬂine by pressing Online

Caution

PCL font cards may be purchased from Xerox / Rank Xerox.

See Appendix D: Ordering Information.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

❖

4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d d i n g F o n t s

Certain software applications offer additional fonts to those

supplied with your printer. These fonts are stored on the host

and then downloaded into printer memory by the software

application when printing.

Fonts within

Software

Applications

Unless speciﬁed as permanently downloaded fonts (see

page 4-12), software application fonts are downloaded to

printer memory before being used for a speciﬁc print job and

are removed from printer memory after completion of that

print job.

Installation of the Xerox printer driver provides the printer

with the capability of recognizing which fonts are resident

and which are not. Selecting resident fonts saves memory

and time.

Note

4-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e l e c t i n g

F o n t

How is a font selected for printing?

The general answer is that you select a font within the

Selecting

a Font

application you are running. For example, if you are using a

word processing application, you will select a font from the

font list within the application.

If desired, you may select a font (PCL fonts only) from the

Control Panel or Remote User Interface (RUI). For an

explanation of how to do this, see Chapter 3: Using the

Control Panel, Font Number (page 3-20), or refer to the

Documentation Services for Printing Guide for the RUI.

A font selected from the Control Panel or RUI becomes the

default font for the printer unless overridden by the selection

of a different font from your software application.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

❖

4-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s

Whether you do or do not use additional fonts, it is helpful to

know a few facts about how the printer uses fonts either

resident in the printer or downloaded (transferred) from the

host.

Downloading

Fonts

Each time you specify a font in a document to be printed, the

font is downloaded to printer, unless the font is already:

•

Resident in the printer’s ROM (read-only memory)—PCL

only.

Speciﬁed in the printer driver as permanently

downloaded to the printer’s internal memory—PCL only.

•

Installed on the PostScript card—PostScript only.

Installed on a font card—PCL only.

Downloaded to the hard disk.

Consult your software application’s user documentation for

a discussion of fonts associated with that application.

4-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s

Temporary fonts are PCL fonts downloaded for a particular

print job. As soon as the print job is ﬁnished, the fonts are

cleared from memory. They must be downloaded for each

print job that uses them. Downloading may have an impact

on performance, depending on the number of fonts being

downloaded. As a result, the print job using downloaded

fonts may take longer than one using resident fonts.

Temporary and

Permanent Fonts

As an example, when you print a mostly-text document in a

resident font, printing time is optimal.

If you print that same document using a downloaded font, the

time to print the ﬁrst page is substantially longer than it was

for your resident-font document. The remaining pages also

take longer to print than those of the resident-font document.

For optimal performance, use resident fonts whenever

applicable since they do not require downloading time.

Note

Permanently downloaded fonts are PCL fonts downloaded in

the same way as temporary fonts, but they remain

downloaded for all print jobs until the printer is powered off.

They are permanent only as long as the printer is on.

Similar to resident fonts or those on font cards, permanently

downloaded fonts reduce the processing time for a print job

that uses them. The distinction is that permanently

downloaded fonts occupy printer memory that might be used

otherwise.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

❖

4-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s

How do you know if a font is permanently downloaded?

•

Specify a font to be permanently downloaded when it is

installed or setup within a software application.

Print a PCL Font List (page 3-65) to see all resident fonts,

all fonts installed on any font card, and all permanently

downloaded fonts.

In general, it is not recommended that you permanently

download fonts. Even if unused, permanent fonts occupy

printer memory that cannot be used for other purposes.

Note

In a networked environment, carefully coordinate the use of

permanently downloaded fonts. Avoid allowing multiple

users to specify permanently downloaded fonts since printer

memory may be consumed rapidly and may cause printer

faults.

Additional memory (SIMMs) will enable the printer to hold

more downloaded fonts. See Chapter 1: Introduction,

“Memory Considerations” (page 1-6) and Chapter 5: Adding

Printer Options for more information about printer memory.

4-14 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5

Adding Printer Options

retpahC

Overview ............................................................................... 5-2

Installing a SIMM .................................................................. 5-5

Installing a Font Card ......................................................... 5-17

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

❖

5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

The following printer options are available for the

4520/4520mp printers:

Overview

•

4 MB and 16 MB SIMMs. One 4 MB SIMM is

factory-installed on the 4520mp.

SIMMs (single in-line memory modules) are small circuit

boards with memory chips. Up to three SIMMs can be

installed in the printer. See “Installing a SIMM”

(page 5-5).

•

PostScript. Factory-installed on the 4520mp.

Adobe PostScript Level 2 is available to your printer,

either factory-installed or as an option.

If using a 4520mp printer, refer to the PostScript Option

Installation Instructions packaged with the printer. Also,

see Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, “PostScript

Menu” (page 3-29).

•

Multi-sheet Bypass Feeder (MBF)

Holding up to 100 sheets of standard weight paper, the

MBF provides for small capacity printing needs. See

Chapter 2: Handling Paper, “Multi-sheet Bypass Feeder

(MBF)” (page 2-14).

High-Capacity Feeder (HCF)

Providing for large volume printing needs, the HCF holds

up to 1500 sheets of standard weight paper and comes in

two paper sizes: A4 and 8.5 x 11 (Letter). See

Chapter 2: Handling Paper, “High-Capacity Feeder

(HCF)” (page 2-15).

•

High-Capacity Envelope Feeder (HCEF)

Providing for large volume envelope printing needs, the

HCEF holds up to 250 envelopes of standard weight and

comes in two sizes: Com-10 and DL. See

Chapter 2: Handling Paper, “High-Capacity Envelope

Feeder (HCEF)” (page 2-16).

5-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

•

Paper trays

A variety of trays may be ordered separately for the

4520/4520mp printers. See Chapter 2: Handling Paper,

“Paper Trays” (page 2-9).

•

Ethernet network interface card. Factory-installed on the

4520mp.

The Xerox Network Interface Card-Ethernet

(XNIC-E’NET) supports the Novell, TCP/IP, EtherTalk,

DecLat, and LAN Manager protocols and is equipped

with both BNC and RJ-45 connectors.

If using a 4520mp printer, refer to the Networking:

Ethernet (XNIC-E’NET) Installation and Conﬁguration

Guide. Also, see Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel,

“Ethernet Menu Options” (page 3-52).

•

LocalTalk card

The Xerox Network Interface Card-LocalTalk

(XNIC-L’TALK) supports the AppleTalk protocols and is

equipped with a DIN-8 connector.

See Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, “LocalTalk Menu

Option” (page 3-51).

Token Ring card

The Xerox Network Interface Card-Token Ring

(XNIC-T’RING) supports the Novell and LAN Manager

protocols and is equipped with both RJ-45 and female

DE-9 connectors.

See Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, “Token Ring

Menu Options” (page 3-55).

•

Font card

Font cards are inserted into one or both of the font card

slots in the printer. Font cards hold additional PCL fonts.

See Chapter 1: Introduction (page 1-3) for font card slot

location.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

❖

5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

•

125 MB hard disk

The hard disk option provides an additional 125 MB of

spooling space and a possible font downloading location.

You can order any of these printer options from your dealer or

Xerox / Rank Xerox. See Appendix D: Ordering Information

for complete details.

5-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

Since SIMMs are widely available from manufacturers other

than Xerox and might not contain installation instructions for

the 4520/4520mp printers, installation instructions are

provided here.

Installing a

SIMM

The 4520 is equipped with 4 MB of resident base memory. To

expand printer memory, install up to three additional 4 MB or

16 MB SIMMs on the printer controller board.

4520mp Users:

The 4520mp is equipped with a pre-installed 4 MB SIMM for

a total of 8 MB of memory.

Note

To install a SIMM in the 4520/4520mp, follow the steps

below:

Power OFF [0] the

printer.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

❖

5-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

Remove any installed high-capacity feeders.

See the appropriate Installation Instructions for

removing optional feeders.

Disconnect the power

cord from the wall

outlet and remove all

cables.

Remove any installed

font cards.

5-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

With your ﬁngers,

loosen the

thumbscrews.

Thumbscrews are not

removable.

SIMMs and controller boards are sensitive to static electricity.

Before installing a SIMM, discharge static electricity from

your body by touching something metal, such as the metal

back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power

source. If you walk around before ﬁnishing the installation,

again discharge any static electricity.

Caution

Never remove the printer controller board while the printer is

plugged in.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

❖

5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

Do not force the removal

of the printer controller

board. The cable

connections may be

damaged if you try to

remove the board beyond

the built-in stop.

Caution

To access the

controller board, pull

on the thumbscrews

ﬁrmly, but evenly.

Do not pull the board

farther than the built-in

stop.

Locate the SIMM slots

on the printer

controller board.

If you need to replace

a currently installed

SIMM, continue with

Step 8.

If you do not need to

replace a SIMM, skip

to Step 10 (page 5-10).

5-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

When removing a SIMM,

be careful not to damage

the locking clips located

at each end of the SIMM

slot. They may break if

too much pressure is

applied.

Caution

Carefully release the

clips of the SIMM you

are replacing.

Lift the SIMM out of

the slot.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

❖

5-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

Insert the new SIMM

into one of the SIMM

slots.

Be careful not to damage

the locking clips located

at each end of the SIMM

slot. They may break if

too much pressure is

applied.

Caution

Press the SIMM up

until the clips lock it in

place.

The SIMM sits at a

right angle to the

board.

Install additional

SIMMs in the same

manner.

5-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

Slide the printer

controller board back

into the printer.

Use only ﬁnger pressure to tighten the thumbscrews. Do not

use a screwdriver because the threads will be stripped if

excessive torque is applied. The screwdriver slot in the

thumbscrew is only there to start the disengagement of the

controller board after an extended period of time when

ﬁngers may not be able to disengage it.

Caution

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

❖

5-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

Tighten the

Note

thumbscrews using

only your ﬁngers.

Do not use tools.

If the thumbscrews do not

easily turn, reseat the

controller board and try

again.

Reinstall any font

cards removed in

Step 4.

5-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

Reconnect cables and

the power cord.

Reinstall the high-capacity feeder if it was removed

at Step 2.

Do not power ON the printer until after reinstalling a

removed high-capacity feeder. The printer will lose its

high-capacity feeder settings if you power it ON before

reinstalling the feeder.

Caution

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

❖

5-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

At this point, you need to print a Conﬁguration Sheet to verify

that you have properly installed the SIMMs.

Power ON [1] the

printer.

If the printer does not

turn on:

• Power OFF [0].

• Check all

connections and

the electrical

supply outlet.

• Power ON [1].

If the printer still does

not turn on, reseat the

controller board.

Press the door to open

the Control Panel.

5-14 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

On the Control Panel, you may brieﬂy see some

messages. Then you will see the message:

Online

Ready

___

Press Online

You will see:

Offline

_/_

Press a key...

Press Menu

You will see:

Main Menu

Language

Press Down

or Up

until you see:

Main Menu

Test Menu

Press Enter

You will see:

Test Menu

Config. Sheet

Press Enter

again to start printing a

Conﬁguration Sheet.

You will see:

Config. Sheet

Printing...

The Conﬁguration Sheet requires a minute or so to

print.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

❖

5-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

S I M M

Verify the SIMM has been correctly installed.

Xerox 4520 Desktop Laser Printer

Configuration Sheet

On your Conﬁguration Sheet, the “Total system

memory” value should match the amount of memory

you just installed plus the RAM resident on the

printer.

Total prints

Total system memory

Software version

Installed options:

00.00.00

None

00.00.00

Total system memory = nnnn KB

Main Menu

Parallel Menu

Port Enable

Language

English

Port Timeout

System Language

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Bidirectional

Transfer Rate

System Menu

Hex Dump

PCL

Off

Once

Off

Chime

System Messages

Auto Continue

Print Density

Defaults

Low

Note that:

USA

Serial Menu

Port Enable

Port Timeout

System Language

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Port Type

PCL Menu

Copies

Font Source

Font Number

Pitch

PCL

Internal

10.00

12.00

Upper

RS232

9600

Robust XON

High

Point Size

Baud Rate

Default Source

Source Mapping

Upper

Handshake

DTR Polarity

Data Bits

Parity

Stop Bits

• 4 MB SIMM = 4096 KB

• 16 MB SIMM = 16384 KB

HCF-Up-Mid-Low

Manual

Lower

Manual

None

Manual Envelope

Lower

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Paper Size

HCF

Manual

A4 (210x297)

Portrait

Roman-8

Off

MBF Size

Orientation

Form Length

Symbol Set

Zero Margins

Page Protection

Jam Recovery

Resolution

TrueRes

300x300

State Saving

Off

For example, if you installed a 4 MB SIMM on a new

4520:

The Document Company

Resident Memory 4096 KB

+ SIMM

4096 KB

======

8192 KB

Total

If the total system memory value is not correct,

reinstall the SIMM.

5-16 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

F o n t C a r d

To install a font card in the printer, follow the steps below:

Installing a

Font Card

Press Online

take the printer ofﬂine.

Online

Ready

___

Offline

Press a key...

_/_

Insert a font card into

either font card slot.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

❖

5-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I n s t a l l i n g

F o n t C a r d

Press Online

put the printer online.

Offline

Press a key...

_/_

Online

Ready

___

To verify that the printer recognizes the font card as

installed, print a PCL Font List (see page 3-65).

When installing PCMCIA font cards, printing a PCL Font List

will verify that the cards have been inserted correctly and are

recognized by the printer. If the PCL Font List does not show

the fonts on the cards, reinsert the font cards or cycle the

power on the printer and print another PCL Font List to verify

that the fonts on the PCMCIA cards are recognized.

Note

5-18 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6

Maintaining the Printer

retpahC

Overview ............................................................................... 6-2

Replacing the EP Cartridge .................................................. 6-3

Adjusting the Print Density ............................................... 6-12

Cleaning the Printer ........................................................... 6-14

Transporting the Printer ..................................................... 6-15

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

❖

6-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

Maintaining the printer in good operating condition is

essential to having a reliable, well-running machine.

Overview

This chapter describes the following:

•

EP (electronic printing) cartridge replacement

Adjusting the density (darkness/lightness) of the printing

Regular cleaning

Hints for transporting the printer

6-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

An EP (electronic printing) cartridge will print approximately

12,000 pages of A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) paper, under average

operating conditions (5 percent area coverage). The number

of prints per EP cartridge will decrease if you routinely:

Replacing the

EP Cartridge

•

Print dense text and graphics.

Adjust Print Density (page 6-11) to a dark setting.

Exceed ﬁve percent area coverage.

An EP cartridge contains both microﬁne toner and imaging

drum.

The EP cartridge is clean, efﬁcient, and can be recycled.

Note

The printer will alert you to the need to replace the EP

cartridge by displaying this message:

Toner Low

To order a new EP cartridge (part number 113R2), contact

your dealer or Xerox/Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

❖

6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

To replace the EP cartridge, follow the steps below:

Press the center latch

down to release and

open the top cover.

Follow these guidelines to make sure the EP cartridge is

properly installed:

•

Do not expose the EP cartridge to direct sunlight or

ﬂuorescent light for more than 15 minutes. Overexposure

will permanently damage the photosensitive imaging

drum.

Caution

•

Do not open the drum shutter or touch the green

imaging drum.

Complete the EP cartridge installation within 15 minutes

of removing it from its package.

6-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

Locate the EP

Transfer Corotron

cartridge, transfer

corotron, and

cleaning felt.

Cleaning Felt

Open the cover of the

cleaning felt housing.

The cleaning felt housing

is located directly behind

the printer front cover

Note

and is visible after you

open the printer top

cover.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

❖

6-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

Remove the old

cleaning felt.

Place the new cleaning

felt into its housing.

6-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

Close the cover of the

cleaning felt housing.

The cleaning felt cover

does not latch.

Remove the old

transfer corotron.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

❖

6-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

Insert the new

transfer corotron into

the left block along the

guide rail, and

position the right end

over the connector.

The transfer corotron

does not lock into

position.

Remove the old EP

cartridge.

Please recycle it.

6-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

Unwrap, then shake

the new EP cartridge 4

or 5 times to evenly

distribute the toner.

Unfasten the tape and

paper insert.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

❖

6-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

Remove the insert

from the EP cartridge.

To avoid breaking the tab

or tape, pull the tab out,

not up. If the tab

Caution

separates from the tape,

continue to pull the tape.

Place the EP cartridge

on a ﬂat surface; pull

the tab and tape from

the EP cartridge.

You may have to pull

ﬁrmly.

Dispose of the tab and

tape. Do not touch

clothing.

6-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

Insert the EP cartridge

into the guide

channels marked by

the arrows inside the

top cover.

Close the top cover.

Be sure the cover is

completely closed and

the center latch locked.

If the cover doesn’t

close, reseat the EP

cartridge.

If your printed pages are too light or too dark, you

can adjust the Print Density control.

See page 6-12 for more details.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

❖

6-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d j u s t i n g t h e P r i n t D e n s i t y

The print density was adjusted at the factory to provide

Adjusting the

Print Density

optimum print quality and does not normally require any

adjustment. Should you desire to darken or lighten the print

density, perform the following procedure:

Open the top cover by

pressing the top cover

release latch.

Raise the green handle

on the paper transport

cover and locate the

print density

adjustment knob at the

right rear of the

printer. Turn the knob

to the right (clockwise)

for darker prints, or to

the left

(counterclockwise) for

lighter prints.

6-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d j u s t i n g t h e P r i n t D e n s i t y

Close the top cover

and run a print job to

verify print density. If

additional density

adjustment is

required, repeat steps

1 through 3.

Full range of density

adjustment (full

clockwise to full

counterclockwise) is

Note

intended to provide only

a slight change in print

density. If desired print

density cannot be

achieved, see Chapter 7,

“Print Quality Problems”

(page 7-43).

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

❖

6-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C l e a n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

For optimum performance, the printer should not be placed

near vents or dust-producing equipment. Particles in the air

may enter the printer and cause failures in internal

mechanisms.

Cleaning the

Printer

For best results, clean the outside of the printer with a damp

cloth. Do not use detergents.

Make sure the printer is powered OFF [0] before you clean it.

Caution

6-14 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T r a n s p o r t i n g t h e P r i n t e r

When transporting the printer more than a short distance,

follow the guidelines shown in Figure 6.1.

Transporting

the Printer

Figure 6.1 Hints for transporting the printer

Helpful Hints for Moving the Printer

Use the original shipping box and materials. If the original box or

materials are not available or are unusable, use a sturdy packing box and

a generous amount of cushioning or packing material.

1. Remove the EP cartridge and pack it in sturdy, light-proof material.

A sealed bag is recommended to prevent toner leakage.

2. Remove and/or pack any optional feeder such as the

MBF, HCF, or HCEF. If possible, use the original packing cartons.

3. Remove and pack the Single-sheet Bypass Feeder (SBF).

4. Remove and pack the upper, middle, and lower paper trays.

5. Remove and pack the front output tray.

6. Remove and pack the top output tray wire guide.

7. Disconnect and pack the printer. Remove and pack all printer cables.

If the printer is on a network, refer to your network software guide

or consult with your network administrator before disconnecting the

network cable.

8. Disconnect and pack the power cord.

9. Locate and pack all documentation for the printer.

10. Place the printer, accessories, and documentation in the

original box or in a similar box.

To avoid damaging the printer, always lift it from the

bottom at the sides. Never use the paper source opening.

Caution

Due to its weight, you are strongly advised to get help

lifting the printer.

11. Make sure packing materials will inhibit breakage and jarring.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

❖

6-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-16 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7

Troubleshooting

retpahC

Overview ............................................................................... 7-2

Before Calling for Service 7-2

Locating Your Printer’s Serial Number 7-4

Displayed Control Panel Messages ..................................... 7-5

Paper Jams .......................................................................... 7-27

Printer Operational Problems ............................................ 7-40

Print Quality Problems ....................................................... 7-43

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while

using your 4520/4520mp, and provides some possible

solutions to these problems. This chapter will help you

troubleshoot problems associated with:

Overview

•

Displayed control panel messages

Paper transportation

Printer operation

Deterioration of print quality

If you encounter a problem, locate the type of problem in this

section and perform the suggested corrective actions. If you

are unable to resolve the problem, contact your dealer or

Xerox / Rank Xerox for service.

Before calling for service, be sure you have thoroughly

reviewed the troubleshooting section provided for your type

of problem and have performed the suggested corrective

actions.

Before Calling for

Service

When calling for service, be prepared to provide the

following information:

•

The serial number of the printer. See “Locating Your

Printer’s Serial Number” (page 7-4).

•

Your name and your company’s name

A description of the problem, including the severity of the

problem:

— Critical

Printer is down and/or user has no production

capability

– inability of a critical application (job) to run

– frequency of failure precludes production use

– critical integrity defect

7-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

— Serious

Printer is operational but production capability is

seriously degraded

– inability of a major application (job) to run

– failure requires frequent operational intervention to

maintain productivity

– non-critical integrity defect

— Moderate

Printer is operational, but production capability is

reduced

– a non-critical application (job) can not be printed

– continuing, but infrequent failure requiring

operational intervention

– a non-critical product feature or function does not

work

•

If any special conditions have occurred:

— New application (job) being run?

— Did application run correctly before?

— Have there been any modiﬁcations to the application

(job)?

— Have there been any modiﬁcations to the host

system?

— Has service been performed recently on the printer?

— Does application (job) print properly on another

printer (either Xerox or other type which supports

same emulation)?

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O v e r v i e w

Also have available:

•

Any error code or message displayed on the Control

Panel

•

A copy of the Conﬁguration Sheet

A copy of the output with the problem

A copy of the print job as it was input

If possible, be near the printer when you call so you can

perform any suggested corrective actions.

To locate your printer’s serial number, ﬁrst open the printer’s

top cover. The serial number plate is attached to the printer’s

top cover frame just above the slot area where the EP

cartridge is inserted. See Figure 7.1.

Locating Your

Printer’s Serial

Number

Figure 7.1 Locating Your Printer’s Serial Number

7-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Control Panel messages are listed in alphabetical order in

Figure 7.2, preceded by numerical diagnostic error codes.

Displayed

Control Panel

Messages

Not listed are the Control Panel menu options, settings, or

functions covered in Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel.

Some two-line messages are separated by the top line and

bottom line. In these instances, look up each line of the

message separately.

Note

In Figure 7.2, “ACTION:” indicates what you must do to

respond to or clear the message.

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages

Message

Description/Action

0001^†

The main controller board has failed.

†

Appears in the top left

ACTION: Replace controller, or contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

side of the display.

Indicates which module

failed.

0040^†

A PostScript checksum error has occurred.

†

Appears in the top left

side of the display.

Indicates which module

failed.

ACTION: The PostScript card has failed and needs to be replaced.

0100^†

SIMM in slot 0 has failed.

†

Appears in the top left

ACTION: Move the SIMM to another slot; see “Installing a SIMM” (page 5-5). If a

memory error (0101 or 0102) occurs again, replace the SIMM. If there is no error,

the main controller board has failed. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

side of the display.

Indicates which module

failed.

0101^†

SIMM in slot 1 has failed.

†

Appears in the top left

side of the display.

Indicates which module

failed.

ACTION: Move the SIMM to another slot; see “Installing a SIMM” (page 5-5). If a

memory error (0100 or 0102) occurs again, replace the SIMM. If there is no error,

the main controller board has failed. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

0102^†

SIMM in slot 2 has failed.

†

Appears in the top left

ACTION: Move the SIMM to another slot; see “Installing a SIMM” (page 5-5). If a

memory error (0100 or 0101) occurs again, replace the SIMM. If there is no error,

the main controller board has failed. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

side of the display.

Indicates which module

failed.

Upper and lower font cards were removed while the printer was ofﬂine, but the

cards were still being used by the software application.

Both Cards Out

Replace Original

ACTION: To clear the error message and resume printing, reseat the cards. Press

Online

On completion of the print job, you can take the printer ofﬂine and

remove the cards.

Both the upper and lower font cards were removed while the printer was online.

ACTION: Power OFF the printer, then power it ON to resume.

Card Err. both

Power Off & On

The printer’s High-Capacity Envelope Feeder (HCEF) cover is open or the HCEF is

not ready. Check all connections.

Close HCEF Cover

Close HCF Cover

ACTION: Close the cover, and press Online

to resume normal operation.

The printers’s High-Capacity Feeder (HCF) cover is open or the HCF is not ready.

Check all connections.

ACTION: Close the cover, and press Online

to resume normal operation.

The top cover is open.

Close Top Cover

Comm. Error

ACTION: Close it, and press Online

to resume normal operation.

If your printer is conﬁgured for serial, a framing or parity error has occurred on the

serial interface.

ACTION: You have a mismatch between your printer and the host. Check your

printer serial conﬁguration (baud rate, handshake, parity, etc.) to be certain the

serial settings match your host (page 3-46). If problem persists, contact your dealer

or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

If your printer is conﬁgured for parallel, the printer is not able to communicate

with the host using bidirectional parallel.

ACTION: Check the parallel cable to make sure it is connected properly on both

the printer and the host. Inspect the parallel cable for any defects; if wires are

broken or the cable appears to be damaged, replace the cable. Check the host to

be certain that it is conﬁgured properly. Under the Parallel Menu, turn

Bidirectional Off. If problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

A LocalTalk error has occurred. nn is the AppleTalk error number.

Comm. Error:nn

7-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

The Conﬁguration Sheet is printing.

Conﬁg. Sheet

Printing...

See Conﬁg. Sheet, page 3-64.

ACTION: None

A general failure of the hard disk has occurred.

Disk Failure

Under this message, the following message is displayed:

Press *

ACTION: Press Enter

The printer displays the following message:

Disk Not In Use

Printing resumes without use of the hard disk.

The hard disk high level format (FAT tables) cannot be understood. This is NOT

because a new disk has been installed.

Disk Format Bad

Disk Not In Use

ACTION: This message ﬂashes alternately with the two-line message:

Press↑ to init

Press↓ to Abort

A failure of the hard disk has occurred and been acknowledged. Printing resumes

without use of the hard disk.

ACTION: Check disk ribbon cable connections. If the problem remains, contact

your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Printer cannot read data from the hard disk.

Disk Read Error

Disk Write Error

ACTION: Try powering OFF [0] then ON [1] again. Check disk ribbon cable

connections. If the problem remains, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Printer cannot write data to the hard disk.

ACTION: Press Enter

The printer will mark the disk sector as bad and retry

the write operation at another location on the disk. Check disk ribbon cable

connections. If the problem remains, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

The Ethernet card (XNIC-E’NET) has failed and cannot be used.

Ethernet Fail

ACTION: Press Enter

to allow the printer to continue as if the Ethernet

card were not installed. This error is not subject to Auto Continue (page 3-61).

Print a Conﬁguration Sheet. If the sheet does not show Ethernet as present,

contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

A fan in the printer has failed; printing cannot resume.

ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Fan Failure

Service Required

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

ACTION: Feed A3 paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

Feed A3

ACTION: Feed A4 paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

Feed A4

ACTION: Feed A5 paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

Feed A5

ACTION: Feed B4 (ISO) paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

Feed B4

ACTION: Feed B5 (ISO) paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

Feed B5

ACTION: Feed C5 envelope through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

Feed C5

ACTION: Feed Com-10 envelope through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF),

as indicated on the top line of the display.

Feed Com-10

Feed DL

ACTION: Feed DL envelope through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Feed Executive paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

Feed Exec

Feed Folio

Feed Ledger

Feed Legal

Feed Letter

Flushing…

ACTION: Feed Folio paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Feed Ledger paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Feed Legal paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Feed Letter paper through the manual feed slot (SBF or the MBF), as

indicated on the top line of the display.

For PostScript only, the print job could not be printed and is being parsed out and

discarded.

ACTION: The message remains until the print job being ﬂushed is complete, which

may require further data to be sent from the host.

The hard disk is being partitioned and high level formatted.

Formatting Disk

Please Wait...

7-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

Fuser assembly has failed; printing cannot resume.

ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Fuser Failure

Service Required

Envelopes need to be added to the High-Capacity Envelope Feeder (HCEF).

ACTION: The message on the bottom advises what envelope to load.

HCEF

HCEF, middle, or lower tray needs paper.

HCEF-Mid-Low

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCEF or middle tray needs paper.

HCEF-Middle

HCEF-Lower

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCEF or lower tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCEF, upper, or lower tray needs paper.

HCEF-Up-Low

HCEF-Up-Mid

HCEF-Up-Mid-Low

HCEF-Upper

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCEF, upper, or middle tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCEF, upper, middle, or lower tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCEF or upper tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

The HCEF does not contain paper.

HCEF Empty

HCF

ACTION: Load envelopes into the HCEF.

Paper needs to be added to the High-Capacity Feeder (HCF).

ACTION: The message on the bottom advises what paper to load.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

HCF or lower tray needs paper.

HCF-Lower

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCF or middle tray needs paper.

HCF-Middle

HCF-Mid-Low

HCF-Upper

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCF, middle, or lower tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCF or upper tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCF, upper, middle, or lower tray needs paper.

HCF-Up-Mid-Low

HCF-Up-Mid

HCF-Up-Low

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCF, upper, or middle tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

HCF, upper, or lower tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

The HCF does not contain paper.

ACTION: Load paper into the HCF.

HCF Empty

Hex Dump

Hex dump mode is On.

Used for debugging. See Hex Dump (page 3-60).

ACTION: None

The EP cartridge is missing or not installed correctly.

Install

EP Cartridge

ACTION: Reseat existing cartridge or install a new cartridge. See “Replacing the EP

Cartridge” (page 6-3). If problem continues, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

7-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) has failed on the print engine (also called the

IOT—Image Output Terminal). Printing cannot resume.

IOT NVM Fail

Service Required

ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Laser assembly has failed; printing cannot continue.

ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Laser Failure

Service Required

The printer was busy processing data from a host system but the last page was not

completed, and the last page timeout has expired.

Last Page

ACTION: This message appears until:

• Another print job is received.

• The Port Timeout expires and Auto Job End is On. See Chapter 3: Using the

Control Panel, “Interface Menu” (page 3-38).

• The PostScript “waittimeout” expires. Refer to your PostScript reference

documentation.

ACTION: Load A3 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Load A4 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Load A5 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

Load A3

Load A4

Load A5

Load B4

ACTION: Load B4 (ISO) paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the

display.

This message is for the manual bypass slot (MP tray) only.

ACTION: Load B5 (ISO) paper into the MP tray.

Load B5

ACTION: Load C5 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

Load C5

ACTION: Load Com-10 envelopes (or paper) into the tray(s) indicated on the top

line of the display.

Load Com-10

ACTION: Load DL envelopes (or paper) into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of

the display.

Load DL

ACTION: Load Executive paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the

display.

Load Exec

ACTION: Load Folio paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Load Ledger paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Load Legal paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

Load Folio

Load Ledger

Load Legal

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

ACTION: Load Letter paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

The LocalTalk card (XNIC-L’TALK) has failed and cannot be used.

Load Letter

LocalTalk Fail

ACTION: Press Enter

to allow the printer to continue as if the LocalTalk card

were not installed. This error is not subject to Auto Continue (page 3-59). Print a

Conﬁguration Sheet. If the sheet does not show LocalTalk as present, contact your

dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Lower tray needs paper.

Lower

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper to load. Either

load that size or press Enter

Lower font card was removed while the printer was online.

Lower Card Err

Power OFF & ON

ACTION: Power OFF [0] the printer, then power it ON [1] to resume normal

operations.

Lower font card was removed while the printer was ofﬂine, but the card was still

being used by the software application.

Lower Card Out

Replace Original

ACTION: To clear the error message, take the printer ofﬂine and return the card to

its slot. Then press Online

to resume printing. On completion of the print

job, you can take the printer ofﬂine and remove the card.

The lower tray does not contain paper.

ACTION: Load paper in the lower tray.

Lower Tray Empty

Lower Tray Out

Manual

The lower tray has been removed or is not properly inserted.

ACTION: Insert lower tray.

Your application speciﬁes “Manual” as the paper source so you need to feed from

the SBF.

ACTION: The bottom line advises what size paper to insert. You may use the paper

size requested or any size the feeder will accept.

Your application speciﬁes “Manual” as the paper source so you need to feed from

the MBF.

MBF

ACTION: The bottom line advises what paper size to insert. You may use the paper

size requested or any size the feeder will accept.

7-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

Memory Check was invoked from the Test Menu. See “Test Menu Functions”

(page 3-64).

Memory Check

Please Wait...

The printer resets upon completion.

ACTION: None

Printer controller memory has failed; printing cannot resume.

ACTION:

Memory Failure

Service Required

• Perform a Memory Check (page 3-66) to see if you can locate the problem.

• Try powering OFF [0] the printer then ON [1] again.

If the problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

The middle tray does not contain paper.

ACTION: Load paper into middle tray.

Mid. Tray Empty

Mid. Tray Out

Middle

The middle tray has been removed or is not properly inserted.

ACTION: Insert middle tray.

Middle tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper to load. Either

load that size, or press Enter

Middle or lower tray needs paper.

Middle-Lower

ACTION: The bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to load. Either load

that size or press Enter

Nonvolatile memory in the printer engine or controller has failed; printing cannot

resume.

NV Memory Fail

Service Required

ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Printer is ofﬂine, not in menu mode, and without any fault conditions.

Ofﬂine _/_

Ofﬂine does not mean the printer is disconnected from the computer. It means

page formatting and printing are halted.

ACTION: To put the printer online, press Online

Printer is online and either processing data or ready to accept print jobs.

ACTION: None

Online ___

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

Printer has a paper jam at the front cover.

Open Front Cover

Clear Paper Path

ACTION: Open the cover and remove paper from the paper path. See “Paper

Jams” (page 7-27).

Printer has a paper jam at High-Capacity Envelope Feeder (HCEF).

Open HCEF Cover

Clear Paper Path

ACTION: Open the HCEF cover and remove envelopes from the paper path. See

“Paper Jams” (page 7-27).

Printer has a paper jam at the High-Capacity Feeder (HCF).

Open HCF Cover

Clear Paper Path

ACTION: Open the HCF cover and remove paper from the paper path. See “Paper

Jams” (page 7-27).

Printer has a paper jam at the upper, middle, or lower paper source (accessible

from the back of the printer).

Open Rear Cover

Clear Paper Path

This message alternates at 5-second intervals with a message indicating from

which tray the paper was fed.

ACTION: Open the indicated rear cover and remove paper from the paper path.

See “Paper Jams” (page 7-27).

Printer has a paper jam at the top cover.

Open Top Cover

Clear Paper Path

ACTION: Open the top cover and remove paper from the paper path. See “Paper

Jams” (page 7-27).

Current job cannot print because it exceeds available memory.

See “Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-69).

• For PCL, the bottom line displays, Press *

Out of Memory

–

Even though Auto Continue (page 3-59) may be On, you will see

the message below for ten seconds:

Press *

–

The printer waits ten seconds, then resumes (in effect, pressing

Enter

for you).

• For PostScript, it displays Flushing...

The page is ejected from the printer. Depending on the cause of the problem, your

print job may continue or be ended.

ACTION:

• Reduce resolution to 300 dpi.

• Install additional memory. See “Installing a SIMM” (page 5-5).

• Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

7-14 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

In PCL, the printing on a page is broken up into horizontal bands. When Page

Protection is Off, as a page is processed, each band has a limited time to be

composed and imprinted on the page. Page Too Complex means the current

page cannot print because there is not enough time to compose it.

Page Too Complex

ACTION: Press Enter

The page will be ejected and the print job will

continue. The page that was too complex will be printed on more than one sheet

of paper. To achieve printing on one sheet, set Page Protection (page 3-26) to

the appropriate page size and send the print job again.

Even though Auto Continue (page 3-59) may be On, you will see the message

below for ten seconds:

Press *

The printer waits ten seconds, then resumes (in effect, pressing Enter

for

you).

In paper jam condition, paper was fed (or intended to be fed) from the lower tray.

Paper Fed From

Lower Tray

ACTION: This message alternates at 5-second intervals with a message to clear the

paper path by opening a rear cover. See “Paper Jams” (page 7-27).

In paper jam condition, paper was fed (or intended to be fed) from the middle tray.

Paper Fed From

Middle Tray

ACTION: This message alternates at 5-second intervals with a message to clear the

paper path by opening a rear cover. See “Paper Jams” (page 7-27).

In paper jam condition, paper was fed (or intended to be fed) from the upper tray.

Paper Fed From

Upper Tray

ACTION: This message alternates at 5-second intervals with a message to clear the

paper path by opening a rear cover. See “Paper Jams” (page 7-27).

Printer has a paper jam at the Multi-sheet Bypass Feeder (MBF).

Paper Jam MBF

Clear Paper Path

ACTION: Push button located on the underside of the MBF (to release paper feed

rollers); remove paper.

PCL Font List (page 3-65) is printing.

PCL Font List

Printing...

ACTION: None

The LocalTalk card (XNIC-L’TALK) is being initialized as part of the LocalTalk

network.

[blank]

Please Wait...

ACTION: None

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

Power consumption is reduced by means of the power saver mode.

Power Saver

When no printing has occurred for 60 minutes, the printer will automatically go

into Power Saver mode.

ACTION: None. Treat this message just as you would the message:

Online

Ready

___

The printer has a PCL error.

Press *

ACTION: Press Enter

This message functions with the System Menu option Auto Continue

(page 3-59). When Auto Continue is On, this message is cleared automatically

after ten seconds, and normal printing operation resumes.

The printer has just been taken ofﬂine.

Press a key...

ACTION: No more processing can take place until you press another key (any key).

Either the hard disk’s partition block cannot be understood or it has a bad high

level format.

Press ↑ to init

Press ↓ to Abort

This message ﬂashes alternately with either:

Unknown Disk

Disk Format Bad

Printer is processing data from a computer for printing.

ACTION: None

Processing...

List of PostScript fonts (page 3-65) is printing.

ACTION: None

PS Font List

Printing...

Printer is online and waiting for data to print.

ACTION: None

Ready

The print engine is not communicating with the system controller.

Ready to Print

ACTION: Inspect the system controller to ensure that all wire harness connections

are plugged in. If they are not, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Manual bypass slot (SBF or MBF) has a sheet inserted.

Remove Paper

From Bypass

ACTION: Remove the sheet so that paper can be fed from a different tray.

7-16 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

The electronic printing (EP) cartridge, which contains toner and drum, has expired.

Printing cannot resume.

Replace

EP Cartridge

ACTION: Insert new EP cartridge (see page 6-3).

Reset Menus has been invoked from the Reset Menu (page 3-68).

Reset Menus

Please Wait...

Returns all menu settings except the Language (page 3-68) setting and the

System Menu Defaults (page 3-68) setting to their factory setting and clears any

print jobs, temporary fonts, and macros from memory.

ACTION: None

Reset Printer or Reset All has been invoked from the Reset Menu (page 3-68).

Reset Printer

Please Wait...

The printer clears any print jobs and temporary fonts and macros from memory,

then goes online.

ACTION: None

The printer is in power-on diagnostics. This message appears shortly after

power-on as soon as the Control Panel is initialized and can display text.

Self Test...

If there is no failure during power-on diagnostics, the next message displayed will

indicate the printer is online and ready to receive data.

ACTION: None

The printer was busy processing PCL data from a host system but the job was not

completed since temporary fonts and macros were not deleted. The last page

timeout has expired.

Temp Font/Macro

This message appears until:

• Another print job is received.

• The Port Timeout expires and Auto Job End is On. See Chapter 3: Using the

Control Panel, “Interface Menu” (page 3-38).

ACTION: None

A Test Print is being printed (for use by service technicians).

The message clears once the printing is completed.

ACTION: None

Test Print

Printing...

The Token Ring card (XNIC-T’RING) has failed and cannot be used.

Token Ring Fail

ACTION: Press Enter

to allow the printer to continue as if the Token Ring

card were not installed. This error is not subject to Auto Continue (page 3-59).

Print a Conﬁguration Sheet. If the sheet does not show Token Ring as present,

contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

Toner is getting low in the EP cartridge, but printing will continue without

interruption.

Toner Low

ACTION: Replace the EP cartridge as soon as possible.

A fatal error has occurred.

Turn Power Off

Then On

ACTION: Power OFF [0], then ON [1].

The hard disk partition block cannot be understood. This is probably because a

new disk has been installed.

Unknown Disk

This message ﬂashes alternately with the two-line message:

Press↑ to init

Press↓ to Abort

Upper tray needs paper.

Upper

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to

load. Either load that size, or press Enter

Upper, middle, or lower tray needs paper.

Up-Mid-Low

Upper-Lower

Upper-Middle

ACTION: The bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either

load that size, or press Enter

Upper or lower tray needs paper.

ACTION: The bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to load. Either load

that size, or press Enter

Upper or middle tray needs paper.

ACTION: The bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to load. Either load

that size, or press Enter

Upper font card was removed while the printer was online.

Upper Card Err

Power Off & On

ACTION: Power OFF [0] the printer, then power it ON [1] to resume normal

operations.

Upper font card was removed while the printer was ofﬂine, but the card was still

being used by the application.

Upper Card Out

Replace Original

ACTION: To clear the error message, take the printer ofﬂine and return the card to

its slot. Then press Online

to resume printing. On completion of the print

job, you can take the printer ofﬂine and remove the card.

The upper tray does not contain paper.

ACTION: Add paper to the upper tray.

Upper Tray Empty

7-18 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

The upper tray has been removed or is not properly inserted.

ACTION: Insert upper tray.

Upper Tray Out

The printer was busy processing data from a host but the print job was not

completed.

Waiting...

This message appears until:

• Another print job is received.

• The Port Timeout expires and Auto Job End is On. See Chapter 3: Using the

Control Panel, “Interface Menu” (page 3-38).

• The last page timeout expires.

• The PostScript “waittimeout” expires. Refer to the PostScript reference

documentation.

ACTION: None

Fuser has not warmed up yet.

Warming up

Please Wait...

Message disappears when the printer is ready. The message displays at power-on

and may display after the cover has been opened for some time or when the

printer is exiting power-saver mode.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to A3; appears in PostScript when the page size is A3 and the

printer has changed resolution to 300.

Warning 300/A3

Warning 300/A4

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to A4; appears in PostScript when the page size is A4 and the

printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to A5; appears in PostScript when the page size is A5 and the

printer has changed resolution to 300.

Warning 300/A5

Warning 300/B4

Warning 300/B5

Warning 300/C10

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to B4; appears in PostScript when the page size is B4 and the

printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to B5; appears in PostScript when the page size is B5 and the

printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to Com-10; appears in PostScript when the page size is Com-10

and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

7-20 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to C5; appears in PostScript when the page size is C5 and the

printer has changed resolution to 300.

Warning 300/C5

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to DL; appears in PostScript when the page size is DL and the

printer has changed resolution to 300.

Warning 300/DL

Warning 300/EXE

Warning 300/FOL

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to Executive; appears in PostScript when the page size is Executive

and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to Folio; appears in PostScript when the page size is Folio and the

printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to Ledger; appears in PostScript when the page size is Ledger and

the printer has changed resolution to 300.

Warning 300/LDG

Warning 300/LGL

Warning 300/LTR

Warning 300/OFF

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to Legal; appears in PostScript when the page size is Legal and the

printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to Letter; appears in PostScript when the page size is Letter and

the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or

page protection to OFF.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

7-22 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to A3; appears in PostScript when the page size is A3 and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

Warning 400/A3

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to A4; appears in PostScript when the page size is A4 and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

Warning 400/A4

Warning 400/A5

Warning 400/B4

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to A5; appears in PostScript when the page size is A5 and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to B4; appears in PostScript when the page size is B4 and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to B5; appears in PostScript when the page size is B5 and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

Warning 400/B5

Warning 400/C10

Warning 400/C5

Warning 400/DL

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to C10; appears in PostScript when the page size is C10 and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to C5; appears in PostScript when the page size is C5 and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to DL; appears in PostScript when the page size is DL and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

7-24 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to Executive; appears in PostScript when the page size is Executive

and the printer has changed resolution to 400.

Warning 400/EXE

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to Folio; appears in PostScript when the page size is Folio and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

Warning 400/FOL

Warning 400/LDG

Warning 400/LGL

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to Ledger; appears in PostScript when the page size is Ledger and

the printer has changed resolution to 400.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to Legal; appears in PostScript when the page size is Legal and the

printer has changed resolution to 400.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)

Message

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to Letter; appears in PostScript when the page size is Letter and

the printer has changed resolution to 400.

Warning 400/LTR

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job starts.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 400 or

page protection to OFF.

Warning 400/OFF

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufﬁcient memory to print with

the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

ACTION: None

7-26 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Your printer has been designed to provide reliable, trouble

free operation. However, it is not unusual to experience an

occasional paper jam. Paper jams occur most often when:

Paper Jams

•

The throughput stock does not meet speciﬁcation. See

“Paper Speciﬁcations” (page 2-6).

•

The paper stock is in poor condition.

The paper stock has been improperly loaded into the

paper trays. See “Loading Paper” (page 2-19).

•

The printer needs cleaning. See “Cleaning the Printer”

(page 6-14).

Printer parts have worn and need to be replaced.

When ﬁrst powered ON, the printer detects any jammed

paper. The movement of paper through the printer is

constantly being monitored by the printer’s controllers.

When the printer detects a misfeed or a paper jam, the

printing process is halted, the chime alarm is sounded (if

enabled), and a Control Panel message is displayed.

After the paper jam has been cleared, the printer will resume

operation to complete the print job.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

The paper path is depicted in Figure 7.3.

Figure 7.3 Printer paper paths

When a paper jam is detected, the control panel message

displayed will indicate the area of the printer in which the

jam was detected. As there is a possibility that other jammed

papers may be present in other locations in the paper path,

the entire paper path should be checked each time a paper

jam is cleared.

The Top Cover must always be opened then closed in order to

clear the paper jam message and restart the printer's

operation.

Note

The following sections provide detailed step-by-step

procedures for clearing paper jams as well as some tips to

help troubleshoot reoccurring jams.

7-28 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Figure 7.4 lists control panel messages associated with paper

jam clearing procedures along with an explanation of each

message. To clear a paper jam message you should do the

following:

•

Locate the correct control panel message in Figure 7.4.

Perform, in sequence, all the steps indicated.

Figure 7.4 Paper jam procedures

Message Displayed on

Control Panel

Message Explanation

Steps to Clear Jam

A feed command was sent to the

High-Capacity Feeder or High-Capacity

Envelope Feeder, but paper did not arrive at

the input sensor.

2, 2a, 2b, 2c (page 7-32)

5, 5a, 5b (page 7-36)

6, 6a, 6b (page 7-37)

7 (page 7-39)

Open HCF Cover

Clear Paper Path

Open HCEF Cover

Clear Paper Path

A paper jam has occurred while feeding

form the MBF. The paper did not reach the

input sensor.

1b (page 7-30)

Paper Jam MBF

Clear Paper Path

5, 5a, 5b (page 7-36)

6, 6a, 6b (page 7-37)

7 (page 7-39)

A paper jam has occurred as paper was

leaving a paper tray or a manual feed tray, or

immediately after leaving the paper tray or

manual feed tray.

3, 3a, 3b, 3c (page 7-34)

4, 4a, 4b (page 7-35)

5, 5a, 5b (page 7-36)

6, 6a, 6b (page 7-39)

7 (page 7-39)

Open Rear Cover

Clear Paper Path

alternating with

Paper Fed From

Upper Tray

(or Middle Tray or Lower Tray)

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Figure 7.4 Paper jam procedures (continued)

Message Displayed on

Control Panel

Message Explanation

Steps to Clear Jam

A paper jam has occurred between the

paper transport area and the fuser area

inside the printer.

1, 1A (page 7-30)

4, 4A, 4B (page 7-35)

5, 5A, 5B (page 7-36)

6, 6A, 6B (page 7-37)

7 (page 7-39)

Open Top Cover

Clear Paper Path

A paper jam has occurred as paper was

leaving the fuser area.

4, 4A, 4B (page 7-35)

5, 5A, 5B (page 7-36)

6, 6A, 6B, (page 7-37)

7 (page 7-39)

Open Front Cover

Clear Paper Path

If the Single-sheet

Bypass Feeder (SBF) is

being used, remove

any jammed paper

from the slot by gently

pulling the paper out

of the printer.

7-30 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

If the Single Sheet

Tray feature of the

High-Capacity Feeder

(HCF) is being used,

remove any jammed

paper from the slot by

gently pulling the

paper out of the

printer.

If the Multi-sheet

Bypass Feeder (MBF)

is being used, remove

the jammed paper by

pressing the green

paper release button

on the underside of the

feeder while gently

pulling the paper out

of the feeder.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Press the tray down

button to lower the

paper tray.

Open the feeder door.

7-32 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Remove any misfed

paper or envelopes

from the tray. Check

the paper or envelope

stock for damage, and

make sure that the

stack height does not

exceed the MAXimum

line.

Close the feeder door.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Remove the paper tray (Upper, Middle or Lower) in

use.

Ensure that the paper

is loaded correctly into

the tray with the lead

edges under the metal

corners tabs. If a

universal tray is being

used, ensure that the

paper guides are

adjusted against the

paper stock. (See

Chapter 2 “Handling

Paper” for additional

information regarding

paper tray loading.)

Remove any paper

remaining in the tray

slot by gently pulling

the paper toward the

front of the printer.

Reinsert the paper tray.

7-34 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

If a High-Capacity

Feeder (HCF) or

High-Capacity

Envelope Feeder

(HCEF) is installed,

unlatch the feeder and

move it back away

from the printer.

Open the upper,

middle and lower rear

paper access doors

and remove any

visible paper by gently

pulling it out of the

slot toward the rear of

the printer.

If removed at Step 4 above, relatch the

High-Capacity Feeder or High-Capacity Envelope

Feeder back into the operating position.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Open the top cover by

pressing the top cover

release latch.

The area inside the

printer near the fuser

may be hot.

Caution

Remove any paper

visible in the paper

transportation area

inside the printer by

gently pulling it

upward and toward

the front of the printer.

Lift the paper

transport cover by its

green handle to check

for any paper that may

be caught under the

cover.

Paper removed from this

area may have unfused

toner on it that will soil

your hand or clothing if

touched.

Caution

7-36 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Remove any paper

entering the fuser

area by gently pulling

the paper toward the

rear of the printer.

Open the front cover

by gently pulling on

the top corners of the

cover.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Remove any paper

exiting the fuser area

by gently pulling it

toward the front of the

printer.

Close the front cover.

7-38 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P a p e r J a m s

Close and relatch the

top cover.

On the Control Panel,

press Online

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5 lists common operational problems and

recommended actions.

Printer

Operational

Problems

Figure 7.5 Printer Operational Problems

Problem

Action

Printer will not print

1. Power printer OFF, then ON.

2. Print a Conﬁguration Sheet (see page 3-64).

•

If prints, printer is OK.

If Conﬁguration Sheet does not print, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

A ﬁle sent from the host

does not print

1. Check if printer is Online.

2. Send a plain text ﬁle (i.e., one without printing commands embedded in it) to

the printer. (You may need to depress the form feed key when the LED

remains lit if Auto Job End is not set.)

•

If ﬁle prints correctly in the default font, with all of the characters in the

original ﬁle, the printer is seeing the same data that the host is sending,

and the interface or communication line is functioning correctly.

•

If no data prints (or the last page indicator does not come on):

A. Check conﬁguration to be certain the printer is conﬁgured properly.

B. If using the parallel or serial port, the port may be disabled on the

printer. Check the Conﬁguration Sheet for the port you are using to

see if Port Enable is ON. If OFF, set to ON and try again.

C. If using an optional Xerox network interface card (XNIC) (i.e.,

Ethernet, LocalTalk, or Token Ring), check the Conﬁguration Sheet

to see if the printer is acknowledging that the XNIC is present. (Refer

to XNIC installation instructions packaged with the option.)

–

If the XNIC is not acknowledged, power OFF printer and

unplug. Pull out controller board, remove the XNIC and check

that connector pins are not bent. If bent, straighten. Reseat the

XNIC securely, put controller board back in printer, power ON

and print Conﬁguration Sheet. If XNIC is still not

acknowledged, the XNIC has failed. Contact your dealer or

Xerox / Rank Xerox.

–

If the XNIC is acknowledged, check if printer is recognized by

the host. (Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter of the

respective XNIC installation guide.)

7-40 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5 Printer Operational Problems (continued)

Problem

Action

D. If garbled data, check Conﬁguration Sheet to conﬁrm that the

correct emulation is selected or Language Sensing is ON. Also, check

that printer conﬁguration matches host conﬁguration (i.e., Baud

Rate, Handshake, Data Bits, etc.). If not, correct conﬁguration on

printer and try again.

A printed page does not

look like it should

1. Make certain that the software application you are using to create your print

job is conﬁgured properly. Refer to your software documentation.

2. Send a ﬁle containing PCL or PostScript commands to the printer.

•

If your page prints as it should, your printer and interface are functioning

properly.

•

If your information prints correctly, but doesn’t look right, you may have:

–

An error in your command sequence/operator

A missing downloaded font

A mismatched printer option against your host formatting

A missing or misaligned font card

•

Command errors may be identiﬁed by looking at your input ﬁle or by

using the Hex Dump feature on the printer. You can determine which

fonts are in the system by printing a PCL or PS Font List. And you can

verify your data setup by printing a Conﬁguration Sheet and checking

your printer setup.

In a job, a requested font, 1. Print a PCL Font List (See Chapter 3.)

which is on a font card,

does not print

•

If fonts print on the Font List, your print job may need correcting.

If fonts do not print on the Font List, power the printer OFF, remove and

reinstall the font card. Power the printer back ON, and print another PCL

Font List.

•

If font card is still not being recognized, try another slot or font card,

then print another Font List.

–

If a different font slot works, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox to correct the defective slot.

–

If a new font card is recognized, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox about replacing the defective card.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5 Printer Operational Problems (continued)

Problem

Action

The text printed is a

listing of the PostScript

commands instead of

the PostScript job

1. Make certain that the software application you are using to create your job is

conﬁgured properly. Refer to your software documentation.

2. If Language Sensing is set to ON, the job sent to the printer might have

included an incorrect header and therefore not have indicated that a

PostScript Job was being sent.

•

Set System Language to PostScript in the appropriate Interface Menu (i.e.

Parallel, Serial, etc.) and try sending the job again.

•

Check your software to make sure the PostScript header ﬁle is being sent

to the printer.

The job does not print in

the requested font

1. Check the spelling of the requested font in your PostScript ﬁle. Many times a

typo is the problem. If the font is spelled correctly, print a PostScript Font List

to check if the font is present. If not, download the font and resend the job.

A legal document prints

but the edges are cut off

1. Set Page Protection to Legal. If page is still being clipped, more memory needs

to be installed.

A PostScript job fails to

1. Check the conﬁguration and be certain the proper emulation is selected; also

check the conﬁguration of your printer driver conﬁguration.

2. If Language Sensing is set to ON, set System Language to PostScript in the

appropriate Interface Menu (i.e. Parallel, Serial, etc.) and resend the job.

3. Set Print Errors to ON and resend job.

•

If error page prints, this means that there is a problem in the PostScript

coding. Correct the coding problem and resend the job.

If job does not print and no error page was printed, set Page Protection

to OFF.

If job still does not print, this job may require additional memory.

SBF output image is

skewed with respect to

the sheet/envelope.

1. Check the side guides to be sure that they are snug against both sides of the

sheet but not too tight as to buckle it.

2. Review the insertion directions on page 2-24 to be sure that the entire lead

edge of the sheet has bottomed out.

(The sheet should have a slight buckle along its entire width.)

7-42 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.6 lists common print quality problems, the likely

cause, and recommended actions.

Print Quality

Problems

Figure 7.6 Print Quality Problems

Problem

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions

Light/faint prints

1. Tone level low/empty

1. Replace EP cartridge.

2. Print Density adjustment set

too low

2. Adjust Print Density (see Chapter 6).

Overall image is lighter

than normal.

3. Damp paper stock

3. Replace paper stock.

4. Transfer Corotron wire

broken/dirty

4. Replace Transfer Corotron (see

Chapter 6).

Blank Prints

1. EP Cartridge insert is still in

place

1. Remove the paper insert (see

Chapter 6).

Entire printed page is

blank with no visible

print.

2. Defective EP cartridge

2. Replace EP cartridge.

3. Multiple sheets are being fed

from the paper tray at the

same time.

3. Remove paper from paper tray and fan

it. Ensure that paper is correctly loaded

in tray with edges under metal corners

(see Chapter 2).

4. No printable data received

from computer

4. Produce a Test Print (see Chapter 3). If

the Test Print is normal, check the

following:

•

Interface cable between computer

and printer

•

Printer set up and application

software

If the Test Print is blank, contact your

dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.6 Print Quality Problems (continued)

Problem

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions

Background/black

prints

1. Defective EP cartridge

1. Replace EP cartridge.

2. Print Density adjustment set

too high

2. Adjust Print Density (see Chapter 6).

Overall darkness or

localized dark bands in

the non-image areas.

3. Defective Laser, Controller,

Fuser Assembly

3. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

Spot deletions

1. Damp paper stock

1. Replace paper stock.

2. Replace EP cartridge.

2. Defective EP cartridge

Areas of the print are

extremely light or

missing.

7-44 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.6 Print Quality Problems (continued)

Problem

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions

Vertical line deletions

1. Defective EP cartridge

1. Replace EP cartridge.

2. Replace paper stock.

2. Defective paper stock,

creases, folds, etc.

Localized print deletions

forming narrow lines

running in the direction

of paper movement.

3. Transfer Corotron wire dirty

3. Replace Transfer Corotron (see

Chapter 6).

Horizontal line

deletions

1. Defective EP cartridge

1. Replace EP cartridge.

2. Replace paper stock.

2. Defective paper stock,

creases, folds, etc.

Localized print deletions

appearing as bands

running across the page

perpendicular to the

direction of paper

movement.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.6 Print Quality Problems (continued)

Problem

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions

Vertical dark streaks

1. Defective EP cartridge

1. Replace EP cartridge.

2. Contaminated paper path

2. Clean paper path to remove any toner

accumulations.

Black lines running across

the print in the direction

of paper movement.

3. Replace Fuser Wiper (see Chapter 6). If

problem is not resolved, contact your

dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

3. Contaminated Fuser Rolls or

Wiper

Horizontal dark streaks 1. Defective EP cartridge

1. Replace EP cartridge.

2. Contaminated paper path

2. Clean paper path to remove any toner

accumulations.

Black lines running across

the page perpendicular

to the direction of paper

movement.

3. Contaminated Fuser Rolls or

Wiper

3. Replace Fuser Wiper (see Chapter 6). If

problem is not resolved, contact your

dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

7-46 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.6 Print Quality Problems (continued)

Problem

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions

Dark spots/marks

1. Defective EP cartridge

1. Replace EP cartridge.

2. Contaminated paper path

2. Clean paper path to remove any toner

accumulations.

3. Contaminated Fuser Rolls or

Wiper

3. Replace Fuser Wiper (see Chapter 6). If

problem is not resolved, contact your

dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Residual image

1. Defective EP cartridge

1. Replace EP cartridge.

Ghost images of

previous pages is

produced along with the 2. Contaminated Fuser Rolls or

current page. Wiper

2. Replace Fuser Wiper (see Chapter 6). If

problem is not resolved, contact your

dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.6 Print Quality Problems (continued)

Problem

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions

Unfused or partially

fused image

1. Damp paper stock

1. Replace paper stock.

2. Heavy or unusual paper stock 2. Refer to Chapter 2 for printer

throughput capabilities.

The printed image is not

fully fused to the paper

and easily rubs off.

3. Light image density

3. Replace EP cartridge.

4. Defective Fuser Module

4. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

Skewed prints

1. Paper improperly loaded into

paper tray

1. Check trays for proper paper loading

(see Chapter 2).

Printed image is not

parallel to the edge of

the paper.

2. Obstructed paper path

3. Contaminated paper path

4. Dirty/worn Paper Feed Rolls

2. Inspect paper path for obstructions

(torn pieces of paper, etc.).

3. Inspect/clean paper path to remove

residual toner and paper dust.

4. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

7-48 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.6 Print Quality Problems (continued)

Problem

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions

Image misregistration

1. Paper improperly loaded into

paper tray

1. Check trays for proper paper loading

(see Chapter 2).

The printed image is

mispositioned on the

page.

2. Wrong paper size for

application

2. Check paper stock and printer

conﬁguration.

3. Paper loaded into tray in the

wrong orientation

3. Check trays for proper paper loading

(see Chapter 2).

If problem is not resolved, contact your

dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Produce a Test Print (see Chapter 3)

•

Fold and crease the Test Print as shown.

Both horizontal and vertical folds

should fall within the area deﬁned by

the ﬁrst set of large tick marks on either

side of the center cross target.

If the pattern registers OK, the problem may

be in your software application.

If the pattern is not properly registered,

contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.6 Print Quality Problems (continued)

Problem

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions

Damaged prints

1. Poor paper condition

1. Inspect/replace paper stock.

2. Paper improperly loaded into

paper tray

2. Check trays for proper paper loading

Prints are wrinkled,

creased, or torn.

(see Chapter 2).

3. Obstructed paper path

3. Inspect paper path for obstructions

(torn pieces of paper, etc.).

4. Defective Fuser Module

4. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

7-50 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.6 Print Quality Problems (continued)

Problem

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions

TrueRes Smoothing

problems

TrueRes Smoothing is a

technology that smooths

the jagged edges of

curved or near

vertical/horizontal lines.

Produce Test Prints (see

Chapter 3) with TrueRes

switched both ON and

OFF. Inspect the TrueRes

target on the Test Print:

If:

1. TrueRes is not

functional (no

1. Failed Controller

1. Replace Controller.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

apparent difference

between ON and

OFF setting)

2. TrueRes appears

excessively dark:

2. Print Density set too dark/light 2. Adjust Print Density (see Chapter 6).

TrueRes appears

insufﬁcient

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

❖

7-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7-52 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A

Printer and Cable

Speciﬁcations

x idneppA

Printer Speciﬁcations ........................................................... A-2

Cable Speciﬁcations ............................................................. A-5

Parallel Interface A-5

RS-232C Serial Interface (CCITT V.24) A-8

Data Rates A-8

Encoding A-8

Protocols A-8

Connections A-8

RS-422A Serial Interface (CCITT V.11 and X.27) A-10

Data Rates A-10

Encoding A-10

Protocols A-10

Connections A-10

Network Interface A-12

Null Modem A-12

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

❖

A-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Printer

Speciﬁcations

Imaging method Electro-Photography

Exposure system Semiconductor laser beam (laser diode) scanning

Image resolution 800 x 800, 600 x 600, 400 x 400, and 300 x 300 dpi

Warm up time Less than 60 seconds after power on

Continuous print speed 20 ppm (pages per minute)

Processor 25 MHz AMD 29030 RISC

Maximum Monthly Duty Cycle Up to 50,000 prints

Nominal voltage 220/240 V

110/115 V

Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz

Power consumption Less than 450 W during operation; power saver mode operational after

60 minutes of not printing

Noise level 53 dB continuous sound and 65 dB impulse sound during operation; less

than 40 dB in standby

Temperature 10^°C / 50^°F to 35^°C / 95^°F during operation

Humidity 15% to 85% during operation

Dimensions 51.9 x 41 x 53.3 cm

16.4 x 20 x 21 inches

Weight 35 Kgs / 77 lbs

Maximum Memory Capacity 52 MB

A-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Factory-provided features 4 MB printer memory

Three 250-sheet paper trays

Single-sheet bypass feeder (SBF)

EP (electronic printing) cartridge

Output tray wire guide

Power cord (110 volt printers only)

Document Services for Printing software diskettes

User documentation

On the 4520mp printer:

Additional 4 MB SIMM (for a total of 8 MB)

PostScript option

Ethernet network interface card (XNIC-E’NET)

Options 4 MB SIMM

16 MB SIMM

Multi-sheet Bypass Feeder (MBF)

High-Capacity Feeder (HCF)

High-Capacity Envelope Feeder (HCEF)

Paper trays (in a variety of sizes)

PostScript kit

Ethernet network interface card (XNIC-E’NET)

LocalTalk network interface card (XNIC-L’TALK)

Token Ring network interface card (XNIC-T’RING)

125 MB hard disk

PCL font cards

See Appendix D: Ordering Information for more

information about ordering options.

Note

Printable Area See Figure A.1 for printable area dimensions. (The printer cannot print

outside the printable area.)

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

❖

A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Figure A.1 PCL and PostScript printable area dimensions

Printable Area

Width

Printable Area

Length

Printer Language

PCL

Paper Size

All paper sizes

Determined by the

formula: W – 8.5 mm

(or W – .33 inch) where

Determined by the

formula: L – 8.5 mm

(or L – .33 inch) where

W = physical paper width L = physical paper width

PostScript

200 mm

289 mm

7.89 inches

11.36 inches

8.5 x 11 (Letter)

Executive

8.5 x 14 (Legal)

Com-10

207 mm

8.11 inches

271 mm

10.67 inches

175 mm

6.93 inches

258 mm

10.17 inches

207 mm

8.11 inches

347 mm

13.67 inches

96 mm

3.73 inches

233 mm

9.17 inches

100 mm

212 mm

3.95 inches

8.33 inches

Folio

207 mm

347 mm

8.11 inches

12.67 inches

141 mm

200 mm

5.55 inches

7.89 inches

B5 (ISO)

167 mm

6.61 inches

241 mm

9.53 inches

154 mm

220 mm

6.08 inches

8.68 inches

A-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Figure A.2 shows parallel and serial interface information to

help you obtain the correct printer cable.

Cable

Speciﬁcations

Figure A.2 4520/4520mp parallel and serial cable characteristics

Communication

Printer Connector

Type

Commonly Used for

Protocol

Standard Centronics

Parallel^†Cable

Most PC systems today

Bidirectional

(Centronics standard)

36-pin male

Standard Serial^‡Cable

PCs and modems

RS-232C

25-pin male

RS-422A

† Xerox has certiﬁed Parallel cables with these printers at a maximum of 6 feet.

‡ Xerox has certiﬁed Serial cables with these printers at a maximum of 4 feet.

Parallel Interface

Today most single-user computer systems (IBM PC and

compatibles) utilize the parallel interface because it allows

more data at a time to be transferred from the computer to the

printer than does a serial interface. If the printer is not

connected to a network, printing through the parallel

interface is most desirable.

The printers support a bidirectional parallel port, compatible

with the IEEE standard 1284-B, with forward transfer rates of

100 KBytes or 1 MBytes.

The FAULT signal (pin no. 32) goes true (low) under the

following conditions:

•

Off-line mode selected

Cover open (interlock open)

Paper out

Paper jam

Any machine fault

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

❖

A-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

The FAULT signal goes false (high) when all the above

conditions are corrected.

The Centronics bidirectional parallel interface is designed to

provide plug-to-plug compatibility with a 36 pin Amphenol

57-40360 (or equivalent) connector that connects to an

Amphenol 57-30360 (or equivalent) connector. The cable

length has been certiﬁed at 6 feet, and will be the twisted pair

type 22AWG -15 pairs. Pin assignment and functions for the

Centronics interface are designated in Figure A.3.

Figure A.3 Centronics connector pin assignment

Signal

Signal Name

Source

Function

Pin #

/STROBE

DATA 0

DATA 1

DATA 2

DATA 3

DATA 4

DATA 5

DATA 6

DATA 7

/ACK

HOST

Host Check

Data Bit 0

BIDIRECTIONAL

PRINTER

Data Bit 1

Data Bit 2

Data Bit 3

Data Bit 4

Data Bit 5

Data Bit 6

Data Bit 7

Printer Acknowledge

Printer Busy

Out of Paper

Printer Select

Host Busy

BUSY

PRINTER

SELECT

/AUTOFEED

N/C

PRINTER

HOST

- - - - - -

Not Deﬁned

Logic GND

Chassis GND

GND

A-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Figure A.3 Centronics connector pin assignment (continued)

Signal

Pin #

Signal Name

Source

Function

+ 5V

GND

/INIT

PRINTER

Printer Logic High

Signal GND (/Strobe)

Signal GND (Data 0)

Signal GND (Data 1)

Signal GND (Data 2)

Signal GND (Data 3)

Signal GND (Data 4)

Signal GND (Data 5)

Signal GND (Data 6)

Signal GND (Data 7)

Signal Ground (PE, SELECT, /ACK)

Signal Ground (BUSY, /FAULT)

Signal Ground (AUTOFEED, /SELECTIN, /INIT)

Reset Signal

HOST

PRINTER

- - - - - -

HOST

/FAULT

N/C

Machine Status

33 - 35

Not Deﬁned

/SELECTIN

Select Input

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

❖

A-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

The RS-232C Serial Interface complies with the EIA 232C

standard which deﬁnes the interconnect of Data Terminal

Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication Equipment

(DCE).

RS-232C Serial

Interface (CCITT

V.24)

Data Rates

The user may select line speeds of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,

9600, 19200 and 38400 baud. Default setting is for 9600 baud.

Encoding

Asynchronous communication in the printers supports 7 or

8-bit ASCII data. The string of data bits is encapsulated by 1

Start bit, 1 or 2 Stop bits and may have an appended Parity

bit. Parity (even, odd or none), the number of stop bits and 7

or 8 bit data are selectable from the front panel UI. Default

settings are for 8 bit data with 1 stop bit and parity none.

Protocols

Character protocols are used to regulate the ﬂow of

information between machine and host. The software

handshaking protocol of XON/XOFF, Robust XON/XOFF,

and DTR Polarity are available – DTR provides the hardware

handshaking. The default setting is for Robust XON/XOFF.

Connections

The connector for the RS-232 interface is the 25 pin “D” Shell

type. The use of short cables for interconnect is

recommended. Cable length has been certiﬁed at 4 feet.

A-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

The interface signals and their associated pin assignments

are identiﬁed in the Figure A.4.

Figure A.4 Pin assignment for RS-232C

RS-232C

Function

Signal Name

Pin #

Direction

Chassis GND

GND

- - - - - -

From Printer

To Printer

From Printer

To Printer

- - - - - -

Transmitted Data

Received Data

Request to Send

Clear to Send

Data

Control

GND

Data Set Ready

Signal GND

Carrier Detect

N/C

Control

- - - - - -

Control

- - - - - -

To Printer

- - - - - -

9, 10, 12

Send Data Noninverted

Receive Data Noninverted

Send Data inverted

N/C

- - - - - -

15, 17 – 19

- - - - - -

Receive Data Inverted

Data Terminal Ready

N/C

- - - - - -

From Printer

- - - - - -

21 – 25

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

❖

A-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

The RS-422A Serial Interface is hardware compatible with

the EIA RS-422 standard which deﬁnes the interconnect of

Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication

Equipment (DCE).

RS-422A Serial

Interface (CCITT

V.11 and X.27)

Data Rates

The user may select line speeds of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,

9600, 19200 and 38400 baud. Default setting is for 9600 baud.

Encoding

Asynchronous communication in the printers supports 7 or

8-bit ASCII data. The string of data bits is encapsulated by 1

Start bit, 1 or 2 Stop bits and may have an appended Parity

bit. Parity (even, odd or none), the number of stop bits and 7

or 8 bit data are selectable from the front panel UI. Default

settings are for 8 bit data with 1 stop bit and parity none.

Protocols

XON/XOFF provides the software handshaking on the

RS-422 interface. Robust XON/XOFF is the default.

Connections

The connector for the RS-422A interface is the 25 pin “D”

Shell type. The use of short cables for interconnect is

recommended. Cable length has been certiﬁed at 4 feet.

A-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

The interface signals and their associated pin assignments

are identiﬁed in the Figure A.5.

Figure A.5 Pin assignment for RS-422A

RS-422A

Function

Signal Name

Pin #

Direction

Chassis GND

GND

- - - - - -

GND

- - - - - -

Transmitted Data

Received Data

Request to Send

Clear to Send

- - - - - -

Data Set Ready

Signal GND

- - - - - -

Carrier Detect

N/C

- - - - - -

Data

- - - - - -

9, 10, 12

- - - - - -

Send Data Noninverted

Receive Data Noninverted

Send Data inverted

N/C

From Printer

To Printer

From Printer

- - - - - -

Data

15, 17 – 19

- - - - - -

Data

Receive Data Inverted

Data Terminal Ready

N/C

To Printer

- - - - - -

21 – 25

- - - - - -

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

❖

A-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

A null modem is a device that eliminates both a modem and a

telephone line. When the printers are used with an

Null Modem

asynchronous serial interface connected to a DTE host (such

as a PC-compatible), a modem, modem eliminator, or a null

modem is required. Figure A.6 shows null modem wiring.

Figure A.6 Null Modem wiring

Network Interface

Network interface communication is the most common for

enabling multiple users to print from a host system.

For network interface cables, refer to your network software

documentation.

A-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Printer Commands

(Escape Sequences)

x idneppA

Xerox-Unique Settings ......................................................... B-2

PCL Printer Commands ......................................................... B-3

HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands ................................. B-21

Control Codes ..................................................................... B-25

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

X e r o x - U n i q u e S e t t i n g s

In addition to the standard PCL printer commands, Xerox has

added some unique settings in the following areas:

Xerox-Unique

Settings

•

Paper Source

See the PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS Paper Source

section (page B-4) for the full range of paper sources for

Xerox printers.

•

Page Size

See the PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS Page Size

section (page B-4) for the full range of paper sizes for

Xerox printers.

Resolution

See the GRAPHICS Raster Resolution section (page B-14)

for all resolutions available.

B-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

PCL printer commands—also called escape sequences—are

used by software applications to control how fonts and

graphics are printed on the page. Figure B.1 lists the PCL

printer commands for the 4520/4520mp printers.

PCL Printer

Commands

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

JOB CONTROL COMMANDS

Reset

Universal Exit

Language (ULE)

—

_C%-12345X 027 037 045 049 050

1B 25 2D 31 32 33 34 35

051 052 053 088

Reset

_CE

027 069

1B 45

Number Of

Copies

# of Copies

_C&l#X

027 038 108 # ... # 088

1B 26 6C # ... # 58

Long Edge (Left) # of Decipoints

_C&l#U

_C&l#Z

_C&u#D

027 038 108 # ... # 085

027 038 108 # ... # 090

027 038 117 # ... # 068

1B 26 6C # ... # 55

1B 26 6C # ... # 5A

1B 26 75 # ... # 44

Offset

(1/720”)

Registration

Short Edge

(Top) Offset

Registration

# of Decipoints

(1/720”)

Unit Of

Measure

# = Number of

units per inch

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS

Page Length and Size

Paper Source

Eject Page

_C&l0H

_C&l1H

027 038 108 048 072

1B 26 6C 30 48

1B 26 6C 31 48

Main Paper

027 038 108 049 072

Source (Upper)

Manual Feed

_C&l2H

027 038 108 050 072

027 038 108 051 072

1B 26 6C 32 48

1B 26 6C 33 48

Manual Envelope

Feed

_C&l3H

Alternate Paper

Source (Lower)

_C&l4H

027 038 108 052 072

027 038 108 053 072

1B 26 6C 34 48

1B 26 6C 35 48

Optional Large

Paper Source

(HCF)

_C&l5H

Envelope Feeder

(HCEF)

_C&l6H

027 038 108 054 072

1B 26 6C 36 48

Middle

Executive

Letter

Legal

_C&l7H

_C&l1A

_C&l2A

_C&l3A

_C&l6A

_C&l70A

027 038 108 055 072

027 038 108 049 065

027 038 108 050 065

027 038 108 051 065

027 038 108 054 065

1B 26 6C 37 48

1B 26 6C 31 41

1B 26 6C 32 41

1B 26 6C 33 41

1B 26 6C 36 41

1B 26 6C 37 30 41

Page Size

Ledger

027 038 108 055 048

065

_C&l26A

_C&l27A

_C&l71A

_C&l81A

027 038 108 050 054

065

1B 26 6C 32 36 41

1B 26 6C 32 37 41

1B 26 6C 37 31 41

1B 26 6C 38 31 41

027 038 108 050 055

065

Folio

COM 10

027 038 108 055 049

065

027 038 108 056 049

065

B-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

_C&l90A

_C&l91A

_C&l100A

_C&l72A

_C&l#P

027 038 108 057 048

065

1B 26 6C 39 30 41

027 038 108 057 049

065

1B 26 6C 39 31 41

1B 26 6C 31 30 30 41

1B 26 6C 37 32 41

1B 26 6C #...# 050

027 038 108 049 048

048 065

027 038 108 055 050

065

Page Length

Orientation

# of Lines (5-128)

027 038 108 #...# 080

Orientation

Portrait

_C&l0O

_C&l1O

_C&l2O

027 038 108 048 079

027 038 108 049 079

027 038 108 050 079

027 038 108 051 079

027 038 097 # ... # 080

1B 26 6C 30 4F

1B 26 6C 31 4F

1B 26 6C 32 4F

1B 26 6C 33 4F

1B 26 61 # ... # 50

Landscape

Reverse Portrait

Reverse Landscape _C&l3O

Print Direction

# Degrees of

_C&a#P

Rotation (counter-

clockwise. 90°

increments only)

Margins and Text Length

Top Margin

Text Length

Left Margin

Right Margin

# of Lines

# of Columns

—

_C&l#E

_C&l#F

_C&a#L

_C&a#M

_C9

027 038 108 # ... # 069

1B 26 6C # ... # 45

1B 26 6C # ... # 46

1B 26 61 # ... # 4C

1B 26 61 # ... # 4D

1B 39

027 038 108 # ... # 070

027 038 097 # ... # 076

027 038 097 # ... # 077

027 057

Clear

Horizontal

Margins

Perforation Skip Mode

Perforation Skip Disable

Enable

_C&l0L

_C&l1L

027 038 108 048 076

027 038 108 049 076

1B 26 6C 30 4C

1B 26 6C 31 4C

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

Horizontal Column Spacing

Horizontal

# of 1/120”

_C&k#H

027 038 107 # ... # 072

1B 26 6B # ... # 48

Motion Index

(HMI)

Increments

Vertical Line Spacing

Vertical Motion

Index (VMI)

# of 1/48”

Increments

_C&l#C

027 038 108 # ... # 067

1B 26 6C # ... # 43

Line Spacing

(Lines per inch)

1 line/inch

2 lines/inch

3 lines/inch

4 lines/inch

6 lines/inch

8 lines/inch

12 lines/inch

_C&l1D

_C&l2D

_C&l3D

_C&l4D

_C&l6D

_C&l8D

_C&l12D

027 038 108 049 068

027 038 108 050 068

027 038 108 051 068

027 038 108 052 068

027 038 108 054 068

027 038 108 056 068

1B 26 6C 31 44

1B 26 6C 32 44

1B 26 6C 33 44

1B 26 6C 34 44

1B 26 6C 36 44

1B 26 6C 38 44

1B 26 6C 31 32 44

027 038 108 049 050

068

16 lines/inch

24 lines/inch

48 lines/inch

_C&l16D

_C&l24D

_C&l48D

027 038 108 049 054

068

1B 26 6C 31 36 44

1B 26 6C 32 34 44

1B 26 6C 34 38 44

027 038 108 050 052

068

027 038 108 052 056

068

CURSOR POSITIONING

Vertical and Horizontal

Vertical Position # of Rows

# of Units

_C&a#R

_C*p#Y

_C&a#V

027 038 097 # ... # 082

1B 26 61 # ... # 52

1B 2A 70 # ... # 59

1B 26 61 # ... # 56

027 042 112 # ... # 089

027 038 097 # ... # 086

# of Decipoints

B-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

# of Columns

# of Units

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

1B 26 61 # ... # 43

1B 2A 70 # ... # 58

1B 26 61 # ... # 48

1B 3D

Horizontal

Position

_C&a#C

_C*p#X

_C&a#H

027 038 097 # ... # 067

027 042 112 # ... # 088

027 038 097 # ... # 072

027 061

# of Decipoints

Half Line Feed

End-of-Line Termination

Line

Termination

CR=CR; LF=LF;

FF=FF

_C&k0G

_C&k1G

_C&k2G

027 038 107 048 071

027 038 107 049 071

027 038 107 050 071

1B 26 6B 30 47

1B 26 6B 31 47

1B 26 6B 32 47

CR=CR+LF;

LF=LF; FF=FF

CR=CR;

LF=CR+LF;

FF=CR+FF

CR=CR+LF;

LF=CR+LF;

FF=CR+FF

_C&k3G

027 038 107 051 071

1B 26 6B 33 47

Push/Pop Position

Push/Pop

Position

Push

Pop

_C&f0S

_C&f1S

027 038 102 048 083

027 038 102 049 083

1B 26 66 30 53

1B 26 66 31 53

FONT SELECTION

Symbol Set Selection

Primary Symbol ISO 60:

Set Norwegian 1

_C(0D

027 040 048 068

027 040 049 069

027 040 057 069

1B 28 30 44

1B 28 31 45

1B 28 39 45

ISO 4: United

Kingdom

_C(1E

_C(9E

Windows 3.1

Latin 2

ISO 69: French

ISO 21: German

ISO 15: Italian

_C(1F

_C(1G

_C(0I

027 040 049 070

027 040 049 071

027 040 048 073

1B 28 31 46

1B 28 31 47

1B 28 30 49

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

Microsoft

_C(6J

027 040 054 074

1B 28 36 4A

Publishing

DeskTop

PS Text

_C(7J

027 040 055 074

1B 28 37 4A

_C(10J

_C(12J

_C(13J

027 040 049 048 074

027 040 049 050 074

027 040 049 051 074

1B 28 31 30 4A

1B 28 31 32 4A

1B 28 31 33 4A

MC Text

Ventura

International

Ventura US

Wingdings

_C(14J

027 040 049 052 074

1B 28 31 34 4A

_C(579L

027 040 053 055 057

076

1B 28 35 37 39 4C

PS Math

_C(5M

_C(6M

_C(8M

_C(19M

_C(0N

027 040 053 077

027 040 054 077

027 040 056 077

027 040 049 057 077

027 040 048 078

1B 28 35 4D

1B 28 36 4D

1B 28 38 4D

1B 28 31 39 4D

1B 28 30 4E

Ventura Math

Math-8

Symbol

ISO 8859-1

(ECMA-94) Latin 1

ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 _C(2N

027 040 050 078

027 040 053 078

027 040 048 083

027 040 050 083

027 040 053 084

1B 28 32 4E

1B 28 35 4E

1B 28 30 53

1B 28 32 53

1B 28 35 54

ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 _C(5N

ISO 11: Swedish

ISO 17: Spanish

_C(0S

_C(2S

_C(5T

Windows 3.1

Latin 5

PC Turkish

ISO 6: ASCII

Legal

_C(9T

_C(0U

_C(1U

_C(8U

_C(9U

027 040 057 084

027 040 048 085

027 040 049 085

027 040 056 085

027 040 057 085

1B 28 39 54

1B 28 30 55

1B 28 31 55

1B 28 38 55

1B 28 39 55

Roman-8

Windows 3.0

Latin 1

B-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function Parameter Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

1B 28 31 30 55

1B 28 31 31 55

1B 28 31 32 55

1B 28 31 35 55

1B 28 31 37 55

1B 28 31 39 55

PC-8

_C(10U

_C(11U

_C(12U

_C(15U

_C(17U

_C(19U

027 040 049 048 085

027 040 049 049 085

027 040 049 050 085

027 040 049 053 085

027 040 049 055 085

027 040 049 057 085

PC-8 D/N

PC 850

Pi Font

PC-852

Windows 3.1

Latin 1 (ANSI)

Spacing

Primary Spacing Fixed

Proportional

_C(s0P

_C(s1P

027 040 115 048 080

027 040 115 049 080

1B 28 73 30 50

1B 28 73 31 50

Pitch

Primary Pitch

# Characters/inch

10.0

_C(s#H

_C&k0S

_C&k2S

027 040 115 # ... # 072

027 038 107 048 083

027 038 107 050 083

1B 28 73 # ... # 48

1B 26 6B 30 53

1B 26 6B 32 53

Set Pitch Mode

Compressed

(16.5-16.7)

Elite (12.0)

_C&k4S

_C(s#V

027 038 107 052 083

1B 26 6B 34 53

Point Size

Primary Height

Primary Style

# Points

027 040 115 # ... # 086

1B 28 73 # ... # 56

Style

Upright (Solid)

Italic

_C(s0S

_C(s1S

_C(s4S

_C(s5S

_C(s8S

027 040 115 048 083

027 040 115 049 083

027 040 115 052 083

027 040 115 053 083

027 040 115 056 083

1B 28 73 30 53

1B 28 73 31 53

1B 28 73 34 53

1B 28 73 35 53

1B 28 73 38 53

Condensed

Condensed Italic

Compressed(Extra

Condensed)

Expanded

_C(s24S

027 040 115 050 052

083

1B 28 73 32 34 53

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

Outline

_C(s32S

_C(s64S

_C(s128S

_C(s160S

027 040 115 051 050

083

1B 28 73 33 32 53

Inline

027 040 115 054 052

083

1B 28 73 36 34 53

Shadowed

Outline Shadowed

027 040 115 049 050

056 083

1B 28 73 31 32 38 53

1B 28 73 31 36 30 53

027 040 115 049 054

048 083

Stroke Weight

Primary Font

Stroke Weight

Ultra Thin

Extra Thin

Thin

_C(s-7B

_C(s-6B

_C(s-5B

_C(s-4B

_C(s-3B

_C(s-2B

_C(s-1B

_C(s0B

027 040 115 045 055

066

1B 28 73 2D 37 42

1B 28 73 2D 36 42

1B 28 73 2D 35 42

1B 28 73 2D 34 42

1B 28 73 2D 33 42

1B 28 73 2D 32 42

1B 28 73 2D 31 42

1B 28 73 30 42

027 040 115 045 054

066

027 040 115 045 053

066

Extra Light

Light

027 040 115 045 052

066

027 040 115 045 051

066

Demi Light

Semi Light

027 040 115 045 050

066

027 040 115 045 049

066

Medium (book or

text)

027 040 115 048 066

Semi Bold

Demi Bold

Bold

_C(s1B

_C(s2B

_C(s3B

_C(s4B

_C(s5B

027 040 115 049 066

027 040 115 050 066

027 040 115 051 066

027 040 115 052 066

027 040 115 053 066

1B 28 73 31 42

1B 28 73 32 42

1B 28 73 33 42

1B 28 73 34 42

1B 28 73 35 42

Extra Bold

Black

B-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function Parameter Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

1B 28 73 36 42

Extra Black

Ultra Black

_C(s6B

_C(s7B

027 040 115 054 066

027 040 115 055 066

1B 28 73 37 42

Primary Typeface Family

Typeface Family LinePrinter

Albertus

_C(s0T

027 040 115 048 084

1B 28 73 30 54

_C(s4362T

027 040 115 052 051

054 050 084

1B 28 73 34 33 36 32 54

Antique Olive

Clarendon

Coronet

_C(s4168T

_C(s4140T

_C(s4116T

_C(s4099T

_C(s4197T

_C(s4102T

_C(s4297T

_C(s4113T

_C(s4101T

_C(s4148T

_C(s16602T

027 040 115 052 049

054 056 084

1B 28 73 34 31 36 38 54

1B 28 73 34 31 34 30 54

1B 28 73 34 31 31 36 54

1B 28 73 34 30 39 39 54

1B 28 73 34 31 39 37 54

1B 28 73 34 31 30 32 54

1B 28 73 34 32 39 37 54

1B 28 73 34 31 31 33 54

1B 28 73 34 31 30 31 54

1B 28 73 34 31 34 38 54

027 040 115 052 049

052 048 084

027 040 115 052 049

049 054 084

Courier

027 040 115 052 048

057 057 084

Garamond

Antiqua

027 040 115 052 049

057 055 084

Letter Gothic

Marigold

CG Omega

CG Times

Univers

027 040 115 052 049

048 050 084

027 040 115 052 050

057 055 084

027 040 115 052 049

049 051 084

027 040 115 052 049

048 049 084

027 040 115 052 049

052 056 084

Arial

027 040 115 049 054

054 048 050 084

1B 28 73 31 36 36 30 32

Times New Roman _C(s16901T

027 040 115 049 054

057 048 049 084

1B 28 73 31 36 39 30 31

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

Symbol

_C(s16686T

027 040 115 049 054

054 056 054 084

1B 28 73 31 36 36 38 36

Wingdings

_C(s31402T

027 040 115 051 049

052 048 050 084

1B 28 73 33 31 34 30 32

Font Default

Underline

Primary Font

_C(3@

027 040 051 064

027 041 051 064

1B 28 33 40

1B 29 33 40

Secondary Font

_C)3@

Underline

Enable Fixed

Enable Floating

Disable

_C&d0D

_C&d3D

_C&d@

027 038 100 048 068

027 038 100 051 068

027 038 100 064

1B 26 64 30 44

1B 26 64 33 44

1B 26 64 40

Transparent Print

Transparent

Print Data

# of Bytes

_C&p#X[Data] 027 038 112 # ... # 088

1B 26 70 # ... # 58

FONT MANAGEMENT

Assign Font ID

Font ID #

_C*c#D

_C*c0F

_C*c1F

027 042 099 # ... # 068

027 042 099 048 070

027 042 099 049 070

1B 2A 63 # ... # 44

1B 2A 63 30 46

1B 2A 63 31 46

Font and

Character

Control

Delete all Fonts

Delete all

temporary fonts

Delete last font ID

speciﬁed

_C*c2F

_C*c3F

_C*c4F

_C*c5F

027 042 099 050 070

027 042 099 051 070

027 042 099 052 070

027 042 099 053 070

1B 2A 63 32 46

1B 2A 63 33 46

1B 2A 63 34 46

1B 2A 63 35 46

Delete last

character speciﬁed

Make font

temporary

Make font

permanent

B-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

Copy/Assign the

currently invoked

font as temporary

_C*c6F

027 042 099 054 070

1B 2A 63 36 46

Soft Symbol Set Management / Creation

Set Symbol Set

ID #

_C*c#R

027 042 099 # ... # 082

1B 2A 63 # ... # 52

1B 28 66 # ... # 57

Deﬁne Symbol

Set

# of Bytes

_C(f#W[Data] 027 040 102 # ... # 087

Symbol Set

Control

Delete all symbol

sets

_C*c0S

_C*c1S

027 042 099 048 083

027 042 099 049 083

1B 2A 63 30 53

1B 2A 63 31 53

Delete all

temporary symbol

sets

Delete current soft

symbol set (last ID

_C*c2S

_C*c4S

_C*c5S

027 042 099 050 083

027 042 099 052 083

027 042 099 053 083

1B 2A 63 32 53

1B 2A 63 34 53

1B 2A 63 35 53

Make current soft

symbol set

temporary

Make current soft

symbol set

permanent

Soft Symbol Set Management / Creation

Select Font

(with ID #)

ID # primary font

_C(#X

_C)#X

027 040 # ... # 088

027 041 # ... # 088

1B 28 # ... # 58

1B 29 # ... # 58

ID # secondary

font

SOFT FONT CREATION

Font Descriptor

(font header)

# of bytes

_C)s#W[Data] 027 041 115 # ... # 087

1B 29 73 # ... # 57

1B 28 73 # ... # 57

1B 2A 63 # ... # 45

Download

character

_C(s#W[Data] 027 040 115 # ... # 087

Character code

Character code #

(decimal)

_C*c#E

027 042 099 # ... # 069

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

GRAPHICS

Raster Graphics

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

Raster

Resolution

75 dots/inch

100 dots/inch

150 dots/inch

200 dots/inch

300 dots/inch

400 dots/inch

600 dots/inch

800 dots/inch

_C*t75R

027 042 116 055 053

082

1B 2A 74 37 35 52

1B 2A 74 31 30 30 52

1B 2A 74 31 35 30 52

1B 2A 74 32 30 30 52

1B 2A 74 33 30 30 52

1B 2A 74 34 30 30 52

1B 2A 74 36 30 30 52

1B 2A 74 38 30 30 52

1B 2A 72 30 46

_C*t100R

_C*t150R

_C*t200R

_C*t300R

_C*t400R

_C*t600R

_C*t800R

_C*r0F

027 042 116 049 048

048 082

027 042 116 049 053

048 082

027 042 116 050 048

048 082

027 042 116 051 048

048 082

027 042 116 052 048

048 082

027 042 116 054 048

048 082

027 042 116 056 048

048 082

Raster Graphics Follows

Presentation

027 042 114 048 070

027 042 114 051 070

027 042 114 048 065

orientation

Follows physical

page

_C*r3F

1B 2A 72 33 46

Start Raster

Graphics

Left Raster

Graphics Margin

_C*r0A

1B 2A 72 30 41

Current Cursor

_C*r1A

027 042 114 049 065

027 042 098 # ... # 089

1B 2A 72 31 41

Raster Y Offset

# of Raster Lines

of vertical

_C*b#Y

1B 2A 62 # ... # 59

movement

Set Raster

Compression

Mode (Method)

Unencoded

_C*b0M

027 042 098 048 077

027 042 098 049 077

1B 2A 62 30 4D

1B 2A 62 31 4D

Run-Length

Encoded

_C*b1M

B-14 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

Tagged Image File

Format

_C*b2M

027 042 098 050 077

1B 2A 62 32 4D

Delta Row

_C*b3M

027 042 098 051 077

027 042 098 053 077

1B 2A 62 33 4D

1B 2A 62 35 4D

Adaptive

_C*b5M

compression

]

Transfer Raster

Data by row

# of Bytes

_C*b#W[Data 027 042 098 # ... # 087

1B 2A 62 # ... # 57

End Raster

Graphics

Old version

preferred

_C*rB

027 042 114 066

1B 2A 72 42

_C*rC

_C*r#T

_C*r#S

027 042 114 067

1B 2A 72 43

Raster Height

Raster Width

# Raster Rows

027 042 114 # ... # 084

027 042 114 # ... # 083

1B 2A 72 # ... # 54

1B 2A 72 # ... # 53

# Pixels of the

Speciﬁed

Resolution

THE PRINT MODEL

Imaging

Select Current

Pattern

Solid Black

(default)

_C*v0T

027 042 118 048 084

1B 2A 76 30 54

Solid White

_C*v1T

_C*v2T

027 042 118 049 084

027 042 118 050 084

1B 2A 76 31 54

1B 2A 76 32 54

HP-deﬁned

Shading Pattern

HP-deﬁned

Cross-Hatched

Pattern

_C*v3T

_C*v4T

027 042 118 051 084

027 042 118 052 084

1B 2A 76 33 54

1B 2A 76 34 54

User-deﬁned

pattern

Source

Transparency

Mode

Transparent

Opaque

_C*v0N

_C*v1N

027 042 118 048 078

027 042 118 049 078

1B 2A 76 30 4E

1B 2A 76 31 4E

Pattern

Transparency

Mode

Transparent

Opaque

_C*v0O

_C*v1O

027 042 118 048 079

027 042 118 049 079

1B 2A 76 30 4F

1B 2A 76 31 4F

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

Rectangle Dimensions

Rectangle

Width

(Horizontal Size)

# of dots

_C*c#A

027 042 099 # ... # 065

1B 2A 63 # ... # 41

1B 2A 63 # ... # 48

# of decipoints

_C*c#H

027 042 099 # ... # 072

Rectangle

Height

(Vertical Size)

# of dots

_C*c#B

_C*c#V

027 042 099 # ... # 066

027 042 099 # ... # 086

1B 2A 63 # ... # 42

1B 2A 63 # ... # 56

# of decipoints

Fill Rectangular

Area

Solid Black

_C*c0P

_C*c1P

027 042 099 048 080

027 042 099 049 080

1B 2A 63 30 50

1B 2A 63 31 50

Erase (solid white

ﬁll)

Shaded Fill

_C*c2P

_C*c3P

_C*c4P

_C*c5P

_C*c#G

027 042 099 050 080

027 042 099 051 080

027 042 099 052 080

027 042 099 053 080

027 042 099 # ... # 071

1B 2A 63 32 50

1B 2A 63 33 50

1B 2A 63 34 50

1B 2A 63 35 50

1B 2A 63 # ... # 47

Cross-hatched Fill

User-Deﬁned

Current Pattern

Pattern ID

Shading

% of Shading or

Type of Pattern or

User Pattern ID

2% Gray

_C*c2G

027 042 099 050 071

1B 2A 63 32 47

10% Gray

_C*c10G

027 042 099 049 048

071

1B 2A 63 31 30 47

15% Gray

30% Gray

45% Gray

70% Gray

90% Gray

_C*c15G

_C*c30G

_C*c45G

_C*c70G

_C*c90G

027 042 099 049 053

071

1B 2A 63 31 35 47

1B 2A 63 33 30 47

1B 2A 63 34 35 47

1B 2A 63 37 30 47

1B 2A 63 39 30 47

027 042 099 051 048

071

027 042 099 052 053

071

027 042 099 055 048

071

027 042 099 057 048

071

B-16 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function Parameter Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

100% Gray

_C*c100G

027 042 099 049 048

048 071

1B 2A 63 31 30 30 47

Pattern

1 Horiz. Line

_C*c1G

_C*c2G

_C*c3G

_C*c4G

_C*c5G

_C*c6G

027 042 099 049 071

027 042 099 050 071

027 042 099 051 071

027 042 099 052 071

027 042 099 053 071

027 042 099 054 071

1B 2A 63 31 47

1B 2A 63 32 47

1B 2A 63 33 47

1B 2A 63 34 47

1B 2A 63 35 47

1B 2A 63 36 47

2 Vert. Lines

3 Diagonal Lines

4 Diagonal Lines

5 Square Grid

6 Diagonal Grid

USER-DEFINED PATTERN / MANAGEMENT CREATION

Deﬁne Pattern

# of bytes

_C*c#W[Data 027 042 099 # ... # 087

1B 2A 63 # ... # 57

]

User-Deﬁned

Pattern Control

Delete all patterns

_C*c0Q

_C*c1Q

027 042 099 048 081

027 042 099 049 081

1B 2A 63 30 51

1B 2A 63 31 51

Delete all

temporary

patterns

Delete current

pattern

_C*c2Q

_C*c4Q

_C*c5Q

_C*p0R

_C*p1R

027 042 099 050 081

027 042 099 052 081

027 042 099 053 081

027 042 112 048 082

027 042 112 049 082

1B 2A 63 32 51

1B 2A 63 34 51

1B 2A 63 35 51

1B 2A 70 30 52

1B 2A 70 31 52

Make pattern

temporary

Make pattern

permanent

Set Pattern

Reference

Rotate with

orientation

Point

Follow physical

page

MACROS

Macro ID

Macro ID #

_C&f#Y

027 038 102 # ... # 089

1B 26 66 # ... # 59

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Start Macro Def.

Stop Macro Def.

Execute Macro

Call Macro

Command

Decimal Value

027 038 102 048 088

027 038 102 049 088

027 038 102 050 088

027 038 102 051 088

027 038 102 052 088

027 038 102 053 088

027 038 102 054 088

027 038 102 055 088

Hexadecimal Value

1B 26 66 30 58

1B 26 66 31 58

1B 26 66 32 58

1B 26 66 33 58

1B 26 66 34 58

1B 26 66 35 58

1B 26 66 36 58

1B 26 66 37 58

Macro Control

_C&f0X

_C&f1X

_C&f2X

_C&f3X

_C&f4X

_C&f5X

_C&f6X

_C&f7X

Enable Overlay

Disable Overlay

Delete Macros

Delete All Temp.

Macros

Delete Macro ID

Make Temporary

Make Permanent

_C&f8X

_C&f9X

_C&f10X

027 038 102 056 088

027 038 102 057 088

1B 26 66 38 58

1B 26 66 39 58

1B 26 66 31 30 58

027 038 102 049 048

088

STATUS READBACK

Set Status

Readback

Location Type

Invalid Location

_C*s0T

_C*s1T

027 042 115 048 084

027 042 115 049 084

1B 2A 73 30 54

1B 2A 73 31 54

Currently Selected

All Locations

Internal

_C*s2T

_C*s3T

_C*s4T

_C*s5T

_C*s7T

027 042 115 050 084

027 042 115 051 084

027 042 115 052 084

027 042 115 053 084

027 042 115 055 084

1B 2A 73 32 54

1B 2A 73 33 54

1B 2A 73 34 54

1B 2A 73 35 54

1B 2A 73 37 54

Downloaded

Cartridge

User-Installed

ROM (SIMMs)

B-18 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

Set Status

Readback

Location Unit

All entities of the

Location Type

_C*s0U

_C*s1U

_C*s2U

027 042 115 048 085

027 042 115 049 085

027 042 115 050 085

1B 2A 73 30 55

Entity 1 or

Temporary

1B 2A 73 31 55

1B 2A 73 32 55

Entity 2 or

Permanent

Entity 3

Entity 4

Font

_C*s3U

_C*s4U

_C*s0I

_C*s1I

_C*s2I

027 042 115 051 085

027 042 115 052 085

027 042 115 048 073

027 042 115 049 073

027 042 115 050 073

1B 2A 73 33 55

1B 2A 73 34 55

1B 2A 73 30 49

1B 2A 73 31 49

1B 2A 73 32 49

Inquire Status

Readback Entity

Macro

User-deﬁned

Pattern

Symbol Set

_C*s3I

_C*s4I

_C&r0F

027 042 115 051 073

027 042 115 052 073

027 038 114 048 070

1B 2A 73 33 49

1B 2A 73 34 49

1B 26 72 30 46

Font Extended

Flush All Pages

Flush All

complete pages

Flush All Page

Data

_C&r1F

_C*s1M

_C*s#X

027 038 114 049 070

027 042 115 049 077

027 042 115 # ... # 088

1B 26 72 31 46

1B 2A 73 31 4D

1B 2A 73 # ... # 58

Free Memory

Space

—

Echo

# = Echo value

(-32767 to 32767)

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)

Function

Parameter

Command

Decimal Value

Hexadecimal Value

PROGRAMMING HINTS

End-Of-Line

Wrap

Enabled

_C&s0C

_C&s1C

_CY

027 038 115 048 067

1B 26 73 30 43

1B 26 73 31 43

1B 59

Disabled

027 038 115 049 067

027 089

Display

Functions

OFF

_CZ

027 090

1B 5A

PCL VECTOR GRAPHICS SWITCHING/SET-UP PICTURE FRAME

Enter PCL Mode Use previous PCL

cursor position

_C%0A

027 037 048 065

1B 25 30 41

Use current

HP-GL/2 pen

position for

cursor position

_C%1A

027 037 049 065

1B 25 31 41

Enter HP-GL/2

Mode

Use Previous

HP-GL/2 pen

position

_C%0B

027 037 048 066

1B 25 30 42

Use current PCL

cursor position

_C%1B

_C*c#K

_C*c#L

_C*c0T

027 037 049 066

1B 25 31 42

HP-GL/2 Plot

Horizontal Size

Horizontal size in

inches

027 042 099 # ... # 075

027 042 099 # ... # 076

027 042 099 048 084

1B 2A 63 # ... # 4B

1B 2A 63 # ... # 4C

1B 2A 63 30 54

HP-GL/2 Plot

Vertical Size

Vertical size in

inches

Set Picture

Frame Anchor

Point

Set anchor point

to cursor position

Picture Frame

Horizontal Size

Decipoints

_C*c#X

027 042 099 # ... # 088

027 042 099 # ... # 089

1B 2A 63 # ... # 58

1B 2A 63 # ... # 59

Picture Frame

Vertical Size

_C*c#Y

B-20 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

In Figure B.2, parameters in brackets [] are optional.

HP-GL/2

Context

Printer

Commands

Figure B.2 HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands

Command

Mnemonic

Parameters

DUAL CONTEXT EXTENSIONS

Enter PCL Mode

Esc%#A

0 - Retain previous PCL cursor position

1 - Use current HP-GL/2 pen position

Reset

EscE

None

Primary Font

Font_ID

Secondary Font

Scalable Or Bitmapped Fonts

0 - Scalable fonts only

1 - Bitmapped fonts allowed

PALETTE EXTENSIONS

Transparency Mode

Screened Vectors

0 - Off (opaque)

1 - On (transparent)

[screen_type[,shading[,index]]]

VECTOR GROUP

Arc Absolute

Arc Relative

x_center, y_center, sweep_angle [,chord_angle];

x_increment, y_increment, sweep-angle

[,chord_angle];

Absolute Arc Three Point

Bezier Absolute

x_inter, y_inter, x_end, y_end [,chord_angle];

x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt

x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt

x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt . . .

[x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt

x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt

x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt];

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.2 HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands (continued)

Command

Mnemonic

Parameters

Bezier Relative

x1_control_pt_increments,

y1_control_pt_increments,

x2_control_pt_increments,

y2_control_pt_increments

x3_control_pt_increments,

y3_control_pt_increments . . .

[x1_control_pt_increments,

y1_control_pt_increments,

x2_control_pt_increments,

y2_control_pt_increments,

x3_control_pt_increments,

y3_control_pt_increments];

Plot Absolute

Plot Relative

Pen Down

[x,y . . . [,x,y]];

Pen Up

Relative Arc Three Point

x_incr_inter, y_incr_inter, x_incr_end, y_incr_end

[,chord_angle];

Polyline Encoded

[ﬂag[val]|coord_pair . . . [ﬂag[val]|coord_pair]];

POLYGON GROUP

Circle

radius [,chord_angle];

Fill Rectangle Absolute

Fill Rectangle Relative

Edge Rectangle Absolute

Edge Rectangle Relative

Fill Wedge

x_coordinate, y_coordinate;

x_increment, y_increment;

x_coordinate, y_coordinate;

x_increment, y_increment;

radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [,chord_angle];

polygon_deﬁnition;

Edge Wedge

Polygon Mode

Fill Polygon

0 - Odd/Even

1 - non-zero winding

Edge Polygon

None

B-22 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.2 HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands (continued)

Command Mnemonic

CHARACTER GROUP

Parameters

Select Standard Font

None

Select Alternate Font

Absolute Direction

Relative Direction

Absolute Character Size

Relative Character Size

Character Slant

None

[run, rise];

[width, height];

[tangent_of_angle];

[width [,height]]

Extra Space

Standard Font Deﬁnition

Alternate Font Deﬁnition

Character Fill Mode

Label Origin

[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];

[ﬁll_mode [,edge_pen]];

[position];

Label

[char . . . [char]]1bterm

[1bterm [,mode]];

[spaces, lines];

Deﬁne Label Terminator

Character Plot

Transparent Data

Deﬁne Variable Text Path

[mode];

[path [,line]];

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.2 HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands (continued)

Command

Mnemonic

Parameters

LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP

Line Type

[line_type [,pattern_length [,mode]]];

[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];

[width [,pen]];

Line Attributes

Pen Width

Pen Width Unit Selection

Select Pen

[type];

[pen]; (required, 1 for black (recommended) or 0 for

white)

Symbol Mode

Fill Type

[char];

[ﬁll_type [,option1 [,option2]]];

[x_coordinate, y_coordinate];

Anchor Corner

Raster Fill Deﬁnition

[index [,width, height, pen_nbr . . . pen_nbr]]; (width

and height must be less than 255)

User Deﬁned Line Type

Scale

[index [,gap1 . . . gapn]];

CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP

[x1, x2, y1, y2 [,type [,left, bottom]]];

[x1,xfactor,y1,yfactor,2];

Input Window

[xLL,yLL,xUR,yUR];

[p1x, p1y [,p2x, p2y]];

None

Input P1 and P2

Input Relative P1 and P2

Default Values

Initialize

[n];

Rotate Coordinate System

[angle];

B-24 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C o n t r o l C o d e s

Control Codes

Figure B.3 Control Codes

Decimal

Value

Function

Symbol

Description

Backspace

B_S

Move one column left unless at left margin, in

which case no action is taken.

Horizontal Tab

H_T

Move to next horizontal tab stop. The tab stops

are at the left margin, and every eight columns

to the right of the left margin.

Line Feed

Form Feed

L_F

F_F

Move to next print line while maintaining

current column position.

Move to the ﬁrst line at top of the next page

while maintaining current column position.

Carriage Return

Shift Out

C_R

S_O

Move to left margin on the current print line.

Select characters that follow from the current

secondary font until receipt of a Shift In.

Shift In

Escape

Space

S_I

E_C

S_P

Select characters that follow from the current

primary font until receipt of a Shift Out.

Indicates the beginning of a special control

sequence (escape sequence).

Move one column to the right unless already at

the right margin, in which case no action is

taken.

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

❖

B-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B-26 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

I/O Port Polling

x idneppA

A p p e n d i x C : I / O P o r t P o l l i n g

❖

C-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The 4520/4520mp printers provide a parallel port, serial port,

and three additional network interface port options, all of

which may be active at the same time. Automatic switching

among all active I/O (input/output) ports is supported.

Port Polling Without a Hard Disk Installed

To coordinate automatic switching among the ports, the

printer monitors the parallel, serial, and network interface

ports for incoming data. When a print job is detected on one

port, the printer sends a busy signal to the other ports and

queues the print job into memory for processing. This is

called port polling. Note that while all ports may be

simultaneously active, only one port at a time is able to

receive a print job.

When print jobs are pending on all ﬁve ports (parallel, serial,

Ethernet, LocalTalk, and Token Ring), the port polling

sequence is:

1 Parallel

2 Serial

3 Ethernet

4 Token Ring

5 Back to Parallel

LocalTalk is not a part of this sequence. When a print job is

detected on the LocalTalk port, the print job is put in the

queue immediately after any current job ﬁnishes.

Note

C-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Except for those on the LocalTalk interface, print jobs are

processed in the sequence in which they are received by the

printer. As soon as one print job has ﬁnished, the printer

continues polling until it ﬁnds another port that has received

data.

If a print job is incomplete, the printer waits until the port is

inactive for the Port Timeout period. After that, the printer

ends the incomplete job and continues polling the ports when

either:

•

Auto Job End is On

•

Another print job is received on a port

Therefore, the printer does not excessively service one

particular port.

You may set the Port Timeout period and Auto Job End on

the Control Panel or with the RUI. For additional information

on Port Timeout or Auto Job End, either see Chapter 3: Using

the Control Panel, or refer to the Document Services for

Printing Guide.

Port Polling With a Hard Disk Installed

When a hard disk is installed, the printer can spool print jobs

from the parallel and serial ports. The print jobs are spooled,

without any processing, onto the hard disk. Jobs are then

processed in the order in which they were received.

A p p e n d i x C : I / O P o r t P o l l i n g

❖

C-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D

Ordering Information

x idneppA

Printer Options .................................................................... D-2

Additional Order Items ....................................................... D-8

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

❖

D-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox to order any of the

printer options listed in Figure D.1.

Printer

Options

4520mp Users:

The 4520mp comes with these options pre-installed:

•

4MB SIMM (for a total of 8MB memory)

PostScript card

Note

Ethernet network card.

Figure D.1 Printer options

Option/Part No.

Description

Comments

Printer Memory (SIMM)

TO INSTALL, go to: User’s Guide, Chapter 5.

97K15280 English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

4 MB SIMM

SIMM requirements:

• No parity

• 70 nanosecond access time

• 8 bits

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

• One-sided

It is recommended that you use a SIMM

manufactured by Xerox / Rank Xerox. However,

other SIMMs are widely available. Be sure you

purchase the correct SIMM conﬁguration.

97K15300 English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

16 MB SIMM

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

PostScript

TO INSTALL, go to: Installation instructions

packaged with the option.

97K15260 English (Xerox)

4520 Adobe PostScript

97K21150 English (Rank Xerox) Level 2 language interpreter

97K19920 French

97K19930 German

A minimum of 8 MB of memory is required,

comprised of 4 MB resident base memory plus

one 4 MB SIMM purchased separately. (See

Printer Memory option, above.)

97K19940 Italian

97K19310 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19950 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

D-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Figure D.1 Printer options (continued)

Option/Part No.

Description

Comments

Font Cards

TO INSTALL, go to: User’s Guide, Chapter 5.

Contact Xerox / Rank Xerox

For PCL5e only.

English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Hard Disk

TO INSTALL, go to: Installation instructions

packaged with the option.

97K15370 English (Xerox)

97K19850 English (Rank Xerox)

97K19860 French

125 MB Hard Disk

97K19870 German

97K19880 Italian

97K19320 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19890 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

❖

D-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Figure D.1 Printer options (continued)

Option/Part No.

Description

Comments

Network Interfaces

TO INSTALL, go to: Installation instructions

packaged with the option.

97K15330 English (Xerox)

Ethernet card

97K19610 English (Rank Xerox) (with BNC and RJ-45

The Ethernet card supports the following

protocols:

97K19620 French

connectors)

97K19630 German

97K19640 Italian

97K19270 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19650 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

•

Novell NetWare

TCP/IP

EtherTalk

DEC LAT

LAN Manager

97K15320 English (Xerox)

97K19550 English (Rank Xerox) (with a DIN-8 connector)

97K19560 French

97K19570 German

97K19580 Italian

LocalTalk card

The Token Ring card supports the following

protocols:

•

Novell NetWare

LAN Manager

97K19260 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19590 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Novell systems require Print Server v1.2 and

above, in the form of:

•

PSERVER.VAP for v2.x NetWare ﬁle

servers

PSERVER.NLM for v3.x NetWare

ﬁle servers

PSERVER.EXE for a stand-alone

PC-based print server

97K15340 English (Xerox)

97K19670 English (Rank Xerox) (with RJ-45 and female DE-9

97K19680 French

97K19690 German

Token Ring card

connectors)

97K19700 Italian

97K19280 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19710 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

UNIX TCP/IP systems require:

•

Support for lpd or rprint

(Xerox-supplied)

Clients must support TCP/IP,

TELNET, and UDP

Optional load hosts require TFTP or

RARP protocols

EtherTalk and TokenTalk systems require

AppleTalk Phase 2.

DEC LAT systems (Ethernet only) require that

clients support the LAT protocol under the

VAX/VMS or ULTRIX-32 operating systems.

LAN Manager systems require:

•

OS/2 version 1.30 or above

Microsoft’s LAN Manager version

2.1 and above

•

TCP/IP on the LAN Manager server

D-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Figure D.1 Printer options (continued)

Option/Part No. Description

Comments

PAPER HANDLING OPTIONS (For paper sizes, refer to the User’s Guide, Chapter 2: Handling Paper.)

Paper Trays

TO INSTALL, go to: User’s Guide, Chapter 2.

109R00020 English (Xerox)

Universal

Adjustable to:

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

•

8.5 x 11 (Letter)

8.5 x 13 (Folio)

8.5 x 14 (Legal)

11 x 17 (Ledger)

109R00017 English (Xerox)

Fixed A4

Not adjustable

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

109R00023 English (Xerox)

Fixed 8.5 x 11 (Letter)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

109R00018 English (Xerox)

Fixed A5

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

109R00022 English (Xerox)

Fixed 8.5 x 14 (Legal)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

❖

D-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Figure D.1 Printer options (continued)

Option/Part No.

Description

Comments

109R00021 English (Xerox)

Fixed 11 x 17 (Ledger)

Not adjustable

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

109R00016 English (Xerox)

Fixed A3

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

High-Capacity Feeder (HCF)

TO INSTALL, go to: Installation instructions

packaged with the option.

97K15750 English (Xerox)

97K20000 English (Rank Xerox)

97K20010 French

1500-sheet A4 feeder

The HCF attaches to the SBF slot.

97K20020 German

97K20030 Italian

97K19440 Spanish (Xerox)

97K20040 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

97K15740 English (Xerox)

97K19430 Spanish (Xerox)

1500-sheet 8.5 x 11 (Letter)

feeder

High-Capacity Envelope Feeder (HCEF)

TO INSTALL, go to: Installation instructions

packaged with the option.

97K15760 English (Xerox)

97K19450 Spanish (Xerox)

250 COM-10 envelope

feeder

The HCEF attaches to the SBF slot.

97K15770 English (Xerox)

97K20060 English (Rank Xerox)

97K20070 French

250 DL envelope feeder

97K20080 German

97K20090 Italian

97K19460 Spanish (Xerox)

97K20100 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

D-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Figure D.1 Printer options (continued)

Option/Part No.

Description

Comments

Multiple sheet, envelope, or

transparency feeder

Multi-sheet Bypass Feeder

(MBF)

TO INSTALL, go to: Installation instructions

packaged with the option.

109R00034 English (Xerox)

97K20120 English (Rank Xerox)

97K20130 French

97K20140 German

97K20150 Italian

The MBF attaches to the SBF slot.

Adjustable to:

•

8.5 x 11 (Letter)

8.5 x 13 (Folio)

8.5 x 14 (Legal)

Executive

B5 (ISO)

COM10

97K19350 Spanish (Xerox)

97K20160 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

❖

D-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2 shows additional items for the 4520/4520mp you

may order from your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Additional

Order Items

Figure D.2 Additional order items

Type/Part No.

Description

Comments

EP Cartridge

See Chapter 6: Maintaining the

Printer for installation instructions.

113R2

English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Cables

See Appendix A: Printer and Cable

Speciﬁcations for cable

information.

D-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2 Additional order items (continued)

Type/Part No. Description

Comments

Software Diskettes

For more information on Xerox

software drivers and utilities for

the printer, refer to the Document

Services for Printing Guide.

300E62150 English (Xerox)

300E62150 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62360 French

DS/P Windows 3.1 PCL5e printer

drivers diskette

300E62210 German

300E62460 Italian

300E62410 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62410 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62140 English (Xerox)

300E62140 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62350 French

DOS printer drivers diskette

300E62200 German

300E62450 Italian

300E62400 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62400 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62160 English (Xerox)

300E62160 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62370 French

DS/P SETUP and RUI diskette

300E62220 German

300E62470 Italian

300E62420 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62420 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62180 English (Xerox)

300E62180 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62390 French

Xerox TrueType Screen Font Pack

diskette

300E62340 German

300E62490 Italian

300E62440 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62440 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62250 English (Xerox)

300E62250 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62580 French

DS/P Service Coordinator (NLM)

diskette, and DS/P SMS diskette

300E62550 German

300E62640 Italian

300E62610 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62610 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

❖

D-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2 Additional order items (continued)

Type/Part No.

Description

Comments

Software Diskettes (continued)

For more information on Xerox

software drivers and utilities for

the printer, refer to the Document

Services for Printing Guide.

300K39990 English (Xerox)

300K39990 English (Rank Xerox)

300K40110 French

Disk Kit, containing all of the above

300K40000 German

300K40070 Italian

300K40060 Spanish (Xerox)

300K40060 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300K30151 English (Xerox)

300K30151 English (Rank Xerox)

300K40100 French

Macintosh PostScript printer driver

diskette

300K40090 German

300K40120 Italian

300K40110 Spanish (Xerox)

300K40110 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62240 English (Xerox)

300E62240 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62710 French

Windows PostScript printer drivers

diskette

300E62700 German

300E62730 Italian

300E62720 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62720 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62260 English (Xerox)

300E62260 English (Rank Xerox)

XNIC software DOS distribution

diskette

300E62270 English (Xerox)

300E62270 English (Rank Xerox)

XNIC software UNIX distribution

diskette

300E64510 English (Xerox)

300E64510 English (Rank Xerox)

XNIC software Lan Manager

distribution diskette

D-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2 Additional order items (continued)

Type/Part No.

Description

Comments

User Documentation

720P53360 English (Xerox)

720P53360 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55360 French

Quick Reference

720P54360 German

720P57360 Italian

720P56360 Spanish (Xerox)

720P56360 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53100 English (Xerox)

721P53100 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55100 French

Setting Up Guide

720P54100 German

720P57100 Italian

720P56100 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56100 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53110 English (Xerox)

721P53110 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55110 French

User’s Guide

720P54110 German

720P57110 Italian

720P56110 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56110 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53040 English (Xerox)

721P53040 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55040 French

Document Services for Printing Guide

720P54040 German

720P57040 Italian

720P56040 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56040 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720S53150 English (Xerox)

721S53150 English (Rank Xerox)

720S55150 French

Document kit, containing the four

preceding documents

720S54150 German

720S57150 Italian

720S56150 Spanish (Xerox)

721S56150 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

❖

D-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2 Additional order items (continued)

Type/Part No.

Description

Comments

User Documentation (continued)

720P53320 English (Xerox)

721P53320 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55320 French

Multi-sheet Bypass Feeder (MBF)

Installation Instructions

720P54320 German

720P57320 Italian

720P56320 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56320 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53050 English (Xerox)

721P53050 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55050 French

High-Capacity Feeder (HCF)

Installation Instructions

720P54050 German

720P57050 Italian

720P56050 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56050 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53060 English (Xerox)

721P53060 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55060 French

High-Capacity Envelope Feeder (HCEF)

Installation Instructions

720P54060 German

720P57060 Italian

720P56060 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56060 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

D-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2 Additional order items (continued)

Type/Part No.

Description

Comments

User Documentation (continued)

720P53180 English (Xerox)

721P53180 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55180 French

Networking: Ethernet (XNIC-E’NET)

Installation and Conﬁguration Guide

720P54180 German

720P57180 Italian

720P56180 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56180 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53200 English (Xerox)

721P53200 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55200 French

Networking: LocalTalk (XNIC-L’TALK)

Installation and Conﬁguration Guide

720P54200 German

720P57200 Italian

720P56200 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56200 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53190 English (Xerox)

721P53190 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55190 French

Networking: Token Ring (XNIC-T’RING)

Installation and Conﬁguration Guide

720P54190 German

720P57190 Italian

720P56190 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56190 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53210 English (Xerox)

721P53210 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55210 French

PostScript Installation Instructions

720P54210 German

720P57210 Italian

720P56210 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56210 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53170 English (Xerox)

721P53170 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55170 French

Hard Disk Installation Instructions

720P54170 German

720P57170 Italian

720P56170 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56170 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

❖

D-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D-14 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E

Environmental

Speciﬁcations

x idneppA

A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

❖

E-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Xerox Corporation is committed to an international program to

safeguard our environment by diverting certain products and

materials from the solid waste stream. We do this by reusing

serviceable components and remanufacturing selected products.

The Xerox

Commitment to

Environmental

Quality

To support this effort we have made it easy for you to return selected

printer equipment and empty print cartridges to Xerox. We

recondition the print cartridges and reﬁll them with Xerox toner and

developer. All products we manufacture meet our stringent

performance standards and are backed by the same Total

Satisfaction Guarantee we offer with our newly manufactured

products.

The world-wide effort to remanufacture printer equipment and

recondition and reuse print cartridges beneﬁts the environment and

conserves our natural resources by reducing waste going into our

landﬁlls. Besides, it makes good business sense for Xerox and Xerox

customers. Please join us in this effort.

On Standby (ROS Pause): 40 dB(A)

Acoustic

Noise Figures

Under Operation:

Continuous Sound: 53 dB(A)

Impulse Sound:

65 dB(A)

E-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Class B:

FCC Compliance

Statement for

United States

Users

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits

for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause

harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

•

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician

for help.

Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain

compliance with FCC regulations.

Caution: Changes or modiﬁcations not expressly approved by Xerox

Corporation could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

Canadian EME Regulations:

VDE Compliance

Statement for

International

Users

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio

noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio

interference regulations of the Canadian Department of

Communications.

Cet appareil numérique est conforme aux limites d’émission de

bruits radioélectriques pour les appareils de Classe B stipulées dans

le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique du Ministere des

Communications du Canada.

For Rank Xerox: This laser printer meets the requirements of

EN5022 Class B.

European EME Regulations:

This equipment has been tested and determined to be compliant

with VDE requirements for a Class B device.

A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

❖

E-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Your Xerox equipment and supplies were designed and tested to

meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency

examination, approval, and compliance with established

environmental standards.

Operational

Safety

Attention to the following notes ensures the continued safe operation

of your equipment.

Always connect the equipment to a properly grounded power source

receptacle. If in doubt, have the receptacle checked by a qualiﬁed

electrician.

WARNING: Improper connection of the equipment grounding

conductor can result in electrical shock.

Always follow all warnings and instructions marked on, or supplied

with, the equipment.

Always locate the equipment on a solid support surface with

adequate strength for the weight of the machine.

Always exercise care in moving or relocating the equipment.

Always place the equipment in an area which provides adequate

room area for ventilation and servicing.

Always use the materials and supplies speciﬁcally designed for your

Xerox equipment. Use of unsuitable materials may result in poor

performance and, possibly, a hazardous situation.

Never use a ground adaptor plug to connect the equipment to a

power source receptacle that lacks a ground connection terminal.

Never attempt any maintenance function that is not speciﬁcally

described in this documentation.

Never obstruct ventilation openings. These are provided to prevent

overheating.

Never install the equipment near a radiator or any other heat source.

Never override or “cheat” electrical or mechanical interlock devices.

Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings.

Never operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or odors.

Disconnect the power cord from the power source receptacle and

contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox to correct the problem.

If you need any additional safety information concerning the

equipment or materials, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

E-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those speciﬁed herein may result in a

hazardous radiation exposure.

This product will produce less than 0.1 ppm ozone during normal

operation. The ozone produced is dependent on copy volume and is

heavier than air. Providing the proper environmental parameters as

speciﬁed by Xerox will ensure that concentration levels meet safe

limits.

If additional information concerning ozone is needed, request the

Xerox publication (600P83222), “Ozone,” by calling in the USA

1-800-828-6571.

A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

❖

E-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those speciﬁed herein may result in hazardous

light exposure.

Laser Safety

This equipment complies with appropriate safety standards.

With speciﬁc regard to lasers, the equipment complies with laser

product performance standards set by governmental, national, and

international agencies as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit

hazardous light as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of

customer operation and maintenance.

When you perform various operator functions, laser danger labels

may be visible. These labels are for your dealer or service technician

and are placed on or near panels, or shields, which require a tool for

removal. THESE PANELS ARE NOT TO BE REMOVED BY USERS

OF THE PRINTER. THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE AREAS

INSIDE THESE COVERS.

Luokitus on tehty standardin EN 60825 mukaisesti

Klassningen är gjord i enlighet met standarden EN 60 825

Laser Safety

Warning for

Finland and

Sweden

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

VAROITUS!

Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla

tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle

näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.

VARNING!

Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksansvisning

specﬁcerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som

överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.

E-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

Accounting File The ﬁle SMS generates for storing printer

and job statistics. An accounting ﬁle is created for each

Service Coordinator when DS/P Authorization is set ON in

SETUP. “PRINTER.LOG” is the name of the SMS accounting

ﬁle.

Alert Message A message SMS sends to the client that

notiﬁes user of an event at the printer.

Attach The term used in SMS for logging into a ﬁle server.

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange.

A digital coding system used to represent characters or

control functions electronically, each character being

represented by either 7 or 8 bits.

Auto emulation See Language Sensing.

Baud rate The data transfer rate between the computer and

the printer; set only if the serial port is used. The computer

and the printer must be conﬁgured at the same baud rate

(between 300 and 57.6 KB depending on the type of

computer used).

G l o s s a r y

❖

GL-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bindery A data structure on each ﬁle server that shows the

existence and status of printers on a Novell network.

Bit Binary digit. The smallest unit of information in a digital

computer. A bit can take on the value of either 1 or 0.

Bitmap A pattern of bits representing the dots in a printed

image.

Bitmapped fonts Digitized images of each character in a font.

Bitmapped fonts generally require more memory than

scalable fonts. If you want to change to a different size or

style (like italics), you have to download a separate

bitmapped font.

Boot To restart a computer without turning off the power.

Also referred to as a soft start.

Byte A unit of 8 consecutive bits. A byte is used to represent a

character or control function.

CAPTURE A Novell command used to redirect output from a

client to a print queue.

Character set The collection of characters contained in a font.

Each character set has been designed for a special purpose.

Some sets include all printable characters found on most

standard computer keyboards, while others are intended for

such applications as math, foreign language, typesetting, or

law.

Chargeback See User Chargeback.

Client A PC attached to a Novell network.

Client Software See SMS Client Software.

Conﬁguration File The ﬁle that stores the relationship

between the SMS Service Coordinator and the printer.

“XDSP.NLM” is the name of the SMS conﬁguration ﬁle.

GL-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Context saving See State Saving.

Controller board The printer’s system controller, with

ﬁrmware to direct all printer operations and slots for adding

optional cards. The controller board is accessed through the

back panel of the printer.

Control Panel An LCD display to show status messages,

prompts, and menu items; indicator lights to show the

condition and status of the printer; and keys for accessing the

printer settings. The Control Panel is on the face of the

printer.

Data string The term used to identify textual data—data that

reads as text. SMS accounting export data ﬁles present data

strings enclosed within quotation marks.

Default A printer setting that is used in the absence of any

other setting or command from the user. (See also Factory-set

Default.)

Default font The font that the printer will use if the user or the

software application does not specify otherwise.

Description A setting the supervisor deﬁnes in the DS/P

UTILITY to specify a printer’s uniqueness. SMS users can

locate a printer by its description using the Best Fit feature.

Detach The term used in SMS for logging off a ﬁle server.

Direct-connect printer A printer tied to a Novell network via

its internal network interface card.

Document One or more pages forming a logical whole.

DOS (Disk Operating System) The operating system software

that controls PC systems. Refer to the DOS manual packaged

with your PC system.

Downloaded fonts See Downloading.

G l o s s a r y

❖

GL-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Downloading The process of transferring fonts or other data

from computer to the printer memory. Permanently

downloaded data will be stored in the printer until it is turned

off.

Dpi Dots per inch. A measure of the resolution of a printed

image. Laser printers use dots to form images. The greater

the dpi, the ﬁner the resolution.

DS/P Document Services for Printing. The name of Xerox

printer utility package comprised of SETUP, DS/P UTILITY,

RUI (Remote User Interface), SMS (Service & Management

Services), and printer drivers.

DS/P UTILITY The software that allows NetWare supervisors

to rename direct-connect printers, to assign them to SMS

Service Coordinators, and to set SMS usage parameters.

Emulation Imitating the operational functionality of a

program or language with equaling or surpassing

functionality.

EP cartridge The Xerox electronic printing cartridge that

contains microﬁne toner and the imaging roller drum.

EPROM/ROM Acronyms for Erasable Programmable Read

Only Memory and Read Only Memory, which describe a type

of computer chip used in the printer. EPROM/ROM is where

the ﬁrmware and internal fonts reside.

Error messages 1) Messages that appear on the Control Panel

display when the printer has encountered some difﬁculty.

2) Messages sent to the SMS client when either the printer,

the SMS Service Coordinator, or Novell has encountered

some difﬁculty.

Escape character A control code or control character

represented by ASCII 27 (1B in Hexadecimal) which must be

placed in front of a printer command. The Escape character

GL-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

tells the printer to execute, rather than print, the character

sequence following it.

Escape sequence A sequence of characters beginning with an

escape code and comprising a printer command.

Factory-set default The settings that are programmed into

the Xerox printer before it is shipped from the manufacturer.

These settings are in use unless you permanently override

them using either the printer Control Panel or the Remote

User Interface. Commands from a software application

temporarily override factory defaults.

File Server A network storage device often used to store

master copies of applications software. It is also used for

exchanging and accessing ﬁles without having to copy them

to a ﬂoppy diskette.

Firmware The programs stored in EPROM/ROM chips on the

printer’s controller board.

Font A collection of characters with a consistent style.

Different fonts can be selected for printing. Fonts can refer to

the printer’s internal fonts, or fonts stored in optional font

cards or on your computer.

Font card Small, thin, credit card size electronic devices that

contain fonts.

Font characteristics Font orientation, character height, stroke

weight, and typeface. What a printed font looks like.

Fuser roller Used to bond dry ink to the page.

Handshaking An exchange of signals between two devices in

a computer network, prior to the transfer of data. The purpose

of handshaking is to determine the readiness of each device

to exchange data.

G l o s s a r y

❖

GL-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Host The source of data or the input device for the printer. It

may be a personal computer or network device.

Hot Key Keystroke combinations used to activate and exit the

DOS version of SMS.

I/O (Input/Output) The communication between the printer

and the host computer.

I/O port Input/Output port, where data is received and

transmitted.

IVD See Integrated Visual Display

Integrated Visual Display Also referred to as IVD, this is the

user-interface portion of SMS which displays printer and job

status information. It is from the IVD that the user initiates

SMS functions.

Intellifonts Scalable fonts developed by Agfa Compugraphics

and licensed to Hewlett Packard.

Internal fonts The fonts that come with the printer, residing

in permanent memory: EPROM/ROM.

Language Sensing The ability of a port to sense the PDL

(Page Description Language) of the incoming job and then

switch to that PDL if necessary.

Load balancing An SMS accounting term used for describing

the ability to generate printer usage statistics for each

selected user.

Local printer A printer that is connected to a network client

through a serial or parallel cable. Only the client user has

access to a local printer.

Lower base The optional base for the 4505/4505ps and

4510/4510ps printers that comes in two sizes: 250-sheet and

500-sheet.

GL-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual tray See MP tray.

Menu Choices of settings and controls. There are menus for

the printer’s Control Panel, RUI (Remote User Interface), SMS

(Status & Management Services), and for many software

applications.

Memory The space in a device where information is stored,

or the ability of a device to keep information until needed.

(See also RAM, ROM.)

MP tray Multipurpose tray. The MP tray comes with the

4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers and ﬁts into the

multipurpose paper source on the front of the printer. Also

referred to as the “manual tray.”

NetWare This is the network operating system (NOS)

developed by Novell for use with its networks.

NetWare Loadable Module Also referred to as NLM, this is a

NetWare program which runs on the network operating

system.

NetWare Supervisor A user with access to NetWare

functionality and control over and above that of normal users.

For example, only users with supervisor privileges can create

and delete print queues.

Network Operating System Also referred to as NOS. The

NOS runs on the ﬁle server and serves to control the network.

Network-indirect printer A printer connected to either: 1) a

server running PSERVER.NLM or PSERVER.EXE; or 2) a

network client running RPRINTER. EXE.

NIC An abbreviation for Network Interface Card. The

optional card that attaches to the controller board for

interfacing with a network. (See also XNIC-E’NET,

XNIC-L’TALK, XNIC-T’RING.)

G l o s s a r y

❖

GL-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NLM See NetWare Loadable Module.

NOS See Network Operating System.

NVM Nonvolatile Memory. Memory that is not corrupted

when power is removed, usually due to battery backup; used

to store printer settings while the printer is powered off.

NVRAM Nonvolatile Random Access Memory.

Ofﬂine When the printer is ofﬂine, it does not accept data

from the computer.

Online When the printer is online, it is able to accept data

from the computer.

Orientation Choice of printing portrait (vertically) or

landscape (horizontally) on a page.

Output tray Where printed material is delivered. The output

tray on the 4520/4520mp is located on the top of the printer.

Paper jam When paper becomes wedged somewhere along

the paper path.

Paper source Paper can feed into the printer, via a paper tray

or other paper feeding device. Also, the setting in a software

application that speciﬁes from where paper will feed for

printing. (The paper source is mapped to a physical tray or a

sequence of trays.)

Parallel port A type of port in which data is transmitted and

received in bytes rather than bits. Typically used for local

printing over short distances.

Parity The addition of one or more redundant bits of

information used to verify its accuracy.

PC Personal Computer; speciﬁcally, an IBM PC or compatible.

PCL 5e Hewlett Packard Printer Control Language Level 5e.

GL-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCONSOLE A Novell utility that provides, for example, the

user with the ability to create and delete queues, or to display

a list of jobs currently in the print queue.

PDL Page Description Language. The set of rules that

describe a fully formatted page, independent of the device

used for printing. PCL and PostScript are examples of page

description languages.

Permanent fonts Also called permanently downloaded fonts.

These are fonts set up in an application so that when the

application is loaded, the fonts are downloaded to the

printer’s memory. They then do not have to be downloaded

for every print job. Permanent fonts remain downloaded until

the printer is powered OFF.

Pitch The number of characters to the inch (10 pitch is 10

characters per inch). Typically thought of as “horizontal”

measurement.

Point Type height is traditionally measured in points. One

point is approximately 1/72 inch. Typically thought of as

“vertical” measurement.

Polling A method to control the data coming into the printer

through the I/O ports, which can include the parallel, serial,

and optional network ports. The printer looks at each port in

succession for incoming data, then transfers it to the print

buffer where it waits for processing. The print buffer is shared

among the ports, so data can arrive for different jobs

continuously.

PostScript A page description language (PDL) developed by

Adobe Systems in 1987.

Print density The relative darkness of print on the page.

G l o s s a r y

❖

GL-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print queue A subdirectory on the server to which print jobs

are redirected. Jobs are released from the queue and sent to

the printer when the printer is ready to accept jobs.

Print server A computer system attached to a local area

network that provides shared printing among network

clients. The print server draws ﬁles from print queues on the

ﬁle server. Typically the print server is dedicated only to that

function—it is not used to run other end-user software.

Printer description See Description.

Printer driver A program that communicates between the

printer and the software application. The printer driver

interprets special format codes so the printer can print a page

that matches what you created on the screen. Xerox desktop

laser printers have their own printer drivers so you can take

full advantage of the printer’s features.

Printer macro Used by the page description language to send

often-repeated commands and speciﬁcations, such as

linefeed and carriage return information. (Printer macros are

transparent to the user.)

Printer name The default name assigned to each Xerox NIC,

for example, XNExxxxxx_1, or another valid printer name the

user chooses and assigns when running SETUP. See Valid

Printer Name.

Printer reset See Reset.

Protocol A set of rules governing the exchange of data

between data processing devices.

PSERVER emulation Software that runs on a ﬁle server or a

network interface card and that enables the ﬁle server or

printer to function as a print server.

Queue See Print Queue.

GL-10 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Radio button A type of feature selection device found in the

RUI and SMS Client Software. The radio button is used for

selecting one option among a group of mutually exclusive

options.

RAM Random Access Memory—read and write memory. This

is commonly referred to as just “memory.” RAM is available

on RAM chips and holds information that is used by the

printer. The information may be discarded at the end of a

print job, when you exit an application, or when the printer is

reset, depending on what kind of information it is: incoming

data for printing, downloaded soft fonts or printer macros for

the current PDL.

Reset To restore the printer to all or some of its default

settings.

ROM Read-Only Memory.

RPRINTER emulation Software run on a client PC (connect to

a network-indirect printer) or a Xerox network interface card

that identiﬁes the printer as a remote printer.

RUI Remote User Interface. The RUI is a DS/P component

that runs on a PC and allows the user to select printer settings

from the PC rather than at the printer’s Control Panel.

Scalable fonts Fonts described by formulae that produce a

font outline. The formulae can be used to scale the font up or

down (by point size).

SDF See Standard Data File.

Serial port A type of port in which data is transmitted and

received in bits rather than bytes. Typically used for printing

over longer distances.

Server A special-purpose computer system (typically a PC

using a 80386 or 80486 CPU, or another processor based on

G l o s s a r y

❖

GL-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the Motorola 68000 CPU) that is connected to the local area

network and controls shared peripherals (PCs, printers, etc.).

Service Coordinator The NLM portion of SMS that obtains

job and status information from direct-connect printers and

reports it to users running SMS Client Software. The Service

Coordinator also acquires and stores accounting data

generated by the printer assigned to it during SETUP. (The

relationship between the printer and the Service Coordinator

is stored in the Conﬁguration File.)

SIMM Single Inline Memory Module. A SIMM has several

connected memory chips and connects to a slot on the printer

controller board to increase the available RAM on the printer.

The 4520/4520mp printers have two SIMM slots and will

accept SIMMs with 4 MB or 16 MB of memory, with a 70 ns

(nanoseconds) access time.

SMS Status & Management Services. A DS/P component that

resides on the client PC and the ﬁle server. SMS features

include, but are not limited to, the ability to view the status of

various network printers and jobs in their queue, ﬁnd the best

printer for the job, and generate accounting reports.

SMS Client Software The Integrated Visual Display (IVD)

portion of SMS the end-user runs on the PC.

Spooling A portion of memory (in this case on the printer)

that will hold documents to be processed by the printer. This

frees up the computer to go on with other work.

Stand-alone Not connected, directly or indirectly, to a

network. A stand-alone printer is connected to a PC through

a serial or parallel cable.

Standard Data File A data ﬁle format that can be read by

many software applications. SDF ﬁles contain data elements

delimited by any special character, typically the comma. Each

logical record in an SDF ﬁle is terminated by a carriage

GL-12 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

return. SMS accounting export data ﬁles are stored in SDF

format.

State Saving A PCL Menu option that enables you to save

permanent fonts and macros when jobs switch between PCL

and PostScript.

String See Data String.

Supervisor See NetWare Supervisor.

Temporary fonts These are PCL fonts downloaded with a

particular print job and cleared from memory when the job is

ﬁnished.

Toner A dry powdered substance used in the printing

process. The toner supply for the printer is contained in the

recyclable EP (electronic printing) cartridge.

TrueRes Smoothing A PCL capability that smooths curves in

text and graphics to improve print quality.

TrueType fonts A font standard developed by Apple

Computer as an alternative to Adobe Postscript. TrueType

fonts are scalable and can print in both PostScript and PCL

page description languages.

TSR Terminate and Stay Resident. The SMS TSR is a program

that is loaded into the PC’s memory each time the user starts

the PC. The SMS TSR is responsible for routing status

information to the IVD, and displaying alert messages on the

client’s monitor.

Typeface The design of a set of characters and symbols—all

uppercase and lowercase letters, arabic numerals, and

common punctuation and symbols. Typefaces often bear the

name of the person who designed them, like Bodoni and

Garamond.

G l o s s a r y

❖

GL-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Universal paper tray Called “universal” because it adjusts to

a variety of paper sizes.

User chargeback An SMS accounting term deﬁning the

ability to generate user printing costs typically calculated by

multiplying the number of pages printed by the cost-per-page

value.

Valid printer name A printer name that does not begin with

the letters “DSP” and that terminates with the characters

“_1”.

XNIC-E’NET Xerox Network Interface Card-Ethernet. (See

also NIC.)

XNIC-L’TALK Xerox Network Interface Card-LocalTalk. (See

also NIC.)

XNIC-T’RING Xerox Network Interface Card-Token Ring.

(See also NIC.)

GL-14 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Config. Sheet function

Test Menu 3-64

Adjusting print density 6-12

Configuration Sheet 3-14, 3-64,

Auto Continue option

7-7

System Menu 3-61

Context saving, see State

Auto Job End option

also see Port Timeout option

Ethernet Menu 3-54

Parallel Menu 3-44

Saving option

Control Panel

Display 3-4

Keys, see Control Panel keys

Location 1-3

Serial Menu 3-48

Token Ring Menu 3-58

Menu options 3-12 to 3-68

Messages 7-5 to 7-26

Navigating 3-8 to 3-11

Overview 3-3

Baud Rate option

Serial Menu 3-49

Control Panel keys 3-5 to 3-7

Down 3-7

Enter 3-6

Bidirectional option

Parallel Menu 3-45

Bitmapped fonts 4-2

Esc 3-6

Form Feed 3-5

Menu 3-5

Online 3-5

Reset 3-5

Cancel PS Job function

Reset Menu 3-68

Up 3-7

Chime option

System Menu 3-60

Copies option

PCL Menu 3-19

PostScript Menu 3-33

Cleaning

see Printer maintenance

I n d e x

❖

IX-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ethernet Menu 3-52 to 3-54

Options 3-52 to 3-54

Auto Job End 3-54

Data Bits option

Serial Menu 3-50

Frame Type 3-54

Default Source option

PCL Menu 3-21

Lang. Sensing 3-53

Port Timeout 3-53

System Language 3-53

Default Tray option

PostScript Menu 3-33

Defaults option

Flow control, see Handshake option

System Menu 3-61

Font Number option

PCL Menu 3-20

Deutsch option

Language 3-14

Font Source option

PCL Menu 3-19

Disk Spooling option

System Menu 3-62

Fonts

Documentation D-11

Down key 3-7

Adobe PostScript (Type 1) 4-8

Bitmapped 4-2

Definition 4-2

Downloading 4-12 to 4-14

Font card 4-9

Installing 5-17 to 5-18

Slot location 1-3

Font family 4-2

Downloading fonts 4-12 to 4-14

Drilled paper

Loading 2-27 to 2-28

DTR Polarity option

Serial Menu 3-50

Intellifont 4-6

PCL bitmap 4-7

Permanently downloaded 4-13 to 4-14

Printer fonts 4-3

Resident fonts 4-4

Scalable 4-2

Screen fonts 4-3

TrueType 4-5

Emulation, see Lang. Sensing option, State

Saving option

English option

Language 3-14

Enter key 3-6

Form Feed key 3-5

Envelopes

Loading 2-29

Form Length option

PCL Menu 3-24

EP cartridge

Recycling 6-3

Replacing 6-3 to 6-11

Frame Type option

Ethernet Menu 3-54

Français canad. option

Language 3-14

Error Messages 7-5 to 7-26

Esc key 3-6

Français option

Language 3-14

Español option

Language 3-14

Front output tray

Location 2-5

Handshake option

Serial Menu 3-49

IX-2 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hex Dump option

Letterhead

System Menu 3-60

Loading 2-27 to 2-28

High-capacity Envelope Feeder (HCEF) 2-16

High-capacity Feeder (HCF) 2-15

LocalTalk Menu 3-51

Option 3-51

Port Timeout 3-51

Lower source

Location 2-4

Intellifont fonts 4-6

Lower tray

Loading paper 2-19 to 2-23

Location 2-9

Interface

network A-12

parallel A-5

serial A-8, A-10

Interface Menu 3-38 to 3-58

Main Menu system 3-12 to 3-68

Interface Menu, see Interface Menu

PCL Menu, see PCL Menu

PostScript Menu, see PostScript Menu

System Menu, see System Menu

Test Menu, see Test Menu

Ethernet Menu, see Ethernet Menu

LocalTalk Menu, see LocalTalk Menu

Parallel Menu, see Parallel Menu

Serial Menu, see Serial Menu

Token Ring Menu, see Token Ring Menu

Italiano option

Maintenance

see Printer maintenance

Language 3-14

Manual Size option

PostScript Menu 3-34

Jam Recovery option

Effect on memory 3-70

PCL Menu 3-26

MBF Paper Size option

PCL Menu 3-23

PostScript Menu 3-34

Memory

Adding, see SIMM, Installing

Maximum capacity 1-6

Overview 1-6

Jams, see Paper jams

Memory Check function

Test Menu 3-66

Labels

Loading 2-27 to 2-28

Menu key 3-5

Lang. Sensing option

Ethernet Menu 3-53

Parallel Menu 3-43

Serial Menu 3-47

Messages

Error 7-5 to 7-26

Middle source

Location 2-4

Token Ring Menu 3-57

Language 3-14

Options

Middle tray

Loading paper 2-19 to 2-23

Location 2-9

Deutsch 3-14

English 3-14

Español 3-14

Modem, null A-12

Français 3-14

Français canad. 3-14

Italiano 3-14

Multi-sheet Bypass Feeder (MBF) 2-14

Portugués (BRA) 3-14

Network interface A-12

I n d e x

❖

IX-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network ports

Paper sources

Location 1-3

Lower

Location 2-4

Middle

Null modem A-12

Location 2-4

Selecting 2-30 to 2-42

PCL paper sources 2-30

Printing a page 2-31 to 2-32

Source mapping settings 2-33 to 2-35

Single-sheet Bypass Feeder (SBF)

Location 2-4

Online key 3-5

Orientation option

PCL Menu 3-23

Output trays

Capacity 2-5

Front

Upper

Location 2-4

Location 2-5

Top

Location 2-5

Paper trays

Front output

Location 2-5

Lower

Location 2-9

Middle

Page Protection option

Effect on memory 3-69

PCL Menu 3-26

Location 2-9

Top output

Location 2-5

Upper

Paper

Feeding, see Paper feeding

Input sources 2-4

Location 2-9

Parallel interface A-5

Input trays 2-9 to 2-12

Jams 2-5, 3-5, 3-26, 3-34, 3-70, 7-27

also see Jam Recovery option

Loading, see Paper loading

Output tray capacity 2-5

Output trays 2-5

Parallel Menu 3-42 to 3-45

Options 3-42 to 3-45

Auto Job End 3-44

Bidirectional 3-45

Lang. Sensing 3-43

Port Enable 3-42

Port Timeout 3-42

Size 2-7 to 2-8

Weight 2-6

System Language 3-42

Transfer Rate 3-45

Paper feeding

Single-sheet Bypass Feeder (SBF) 2-24 to 2-26

Parallel port

Location 1-3

Paper jams 7-27

Paper loading

Drilled paper 2-27 to 2-28

Envelopes 2-29

Parity option

Serial Menu 3-50

Labels 2-27 to 2-28

PCL Font List function

Letterhead 2-27 to 2-28

Lower tray 2-19 to 2-23

Middle tray 2-19 to 2-23

Upper tray 2-19 to 2-23

Test Menu 3-65

PCL language, see System Language option

Paper Size option

PCL Menu 3-23

IX-4 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCL Menu 3-15 to 3-28

Options 3-18 to 3-28

Copies 3-19

PostScript Menu 3-29 to 3-37

Options 3-32 to 3-37

Copies 3-33

Default Source 3-21

Font Number 3-20

Font Source 3-19

Form Length 3-24

Jam Recovery 3-26

MBF Paper Size 3-23

Orientation 3-23

Page Protection 3-26

Paper Size 3-23

Default Tray 3-33

Jam Recovery 3-34

Manual Size 3-34

Print Errors 3-34

Resolution 3-35

State Saving 3-37

Tray Switching 3-33

TrueRes 3-36

Power Saver option

System Menu 3-62

Pitch 3-20

Point Size 3-21

Resolution 3-27

Power switch

Source Mapping 3-22

State Saving 3-28

Symbol Set 3-25

TrueRes 3-28

Location 1-3

Pre-printed Stationery, see Letterhead

Print density, adjusting 6-12

Pitch option

Print Errors option

PCL Menu 3-20

PostScript Menu 3-34

Point Size option

Print quality problems 7-43

PCL Menu 3-21

Printer maintenance

Port Enable option

Parallel Menu 3-42

Serial Menu 3-46

Cleaning the printer 6-14

EP cartridge replacement 6-3 to 6-11

Moving the printer 6-15

Port Timeout option

also see Auto Job End option

Ethernet Menu 3-53

LocalTalk Menu 3-51

Parallel Menu 3-42

Printer operational problems 7-40

PS Font List function

Test Menu 3-65

Serial Menu 3-46

Token Ring Menu 3-56

Remote User Interface 1-4

Port Type option

Serial Menu 3-49

Reset All function

Reset Menu 3-68

Ports

Reset key 3-5

Network

Location 1-3

Parallel

Location 1-3

Serial

Reset Menu 3-67 to 3-68

Functions 3-67 to 3-68

Cancel PS Job 3-68

Reset All 3-68

Reset Menus 3-68

Reset Printer 3-68

Location 1-3

Portugués (BRA) option

Language 3-14

Reset Menus function

Reset Menu 3-68

PostScript fonts 4-8

Reset Printer function

Reset Menu 3-68

PostScript language, see System Language option

I n d e x

❖

IX-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Resolution option

Symbol Set option

Effect on memory 3-70

PCL Menu 3-27

PostScript Menu 3-35

PCL Menu 3-25

System Language option

Ethernet Menu 3-53

Parallel Menu 3-42

Serial Menu 3-46

RUI 1-4

Token Ring Menu 3-56

System Menu 3-59 to 3-62

Options 3-60 to 3-62

Auto Continue 3-61

Chime 3-60

Serial interface

RS-232C A-8

RS-422A A-10

Serial Menu 3-46 to 3-50

Options 3-46 to 3-50

Auto Job End 3-48

Baud Rate 3-49

Defaults 3-61

Disk Spooling 3-62

Hex Dump 3-60

Power Saver 3-62

System Messages 3-60

Data Bits 3-50

DTR Polarity 3-50

Handshake 3-49

Lang. Sensing 3-47

Parity 3-50

Port Enable 3-46

Port Timeout 3-46

Port Type 3-49

System Messages option

System Menu 3-60

Test Menu 3-63 to 3-66

Functions 3-64 to 3-66

Config. Sheet 3-64

Memory Check 3-66

PCL Font List 3-65

PS Font List 3-65

Stop Bits 3-50

System Language 3-46

Serial number

Locating 7-4

Test Print 3-66

Serial port

Test Print function

Location 1-3

Test Menu 3-66

SIMM

Timeout, see Port Timeout option

Capacity 5-2

Definition 5-2

Installing 5-5 to 5-16

Token Ring Menu 3-55 to 3-58

Options 3-55 to 3-58

Auto Job End 3-58

Single-sheet Bypass Feeder (SBF) 2-12

Feeding paper 2-24 to 2-26

Lang. Sensing 3-57

Port Timeout 3-56

System Language 3-56

Single-sheet Bypass Feeder (SBF) source

Location 2-4

Toner, see EP cartridge

Source Mapping Examples 2-36

Top output tray

Location 2-5

Source Mapping option

PCL Menu 3-22

Transfer Rate option

Parallel Menu 3-45

State Saving option

Effect on memory 3-71

PCL Menu 3-28

Tray Switching option

PostScript Menu 3-37

PostScript Menu 3-33

Stop Bits option

Serial Menu 3-50

IX-6 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting 7-1 to 7-51

Before calling service 7-2

Control Panel messages 7-5

Locating serial number 7-4

Operational problems 7-40

Paper jams 7-27

Print quality problems 7-43

TrueRes option

PCL Menu 3-28

PostScript Menu 3-36

TrueType fonts 4-5

Type 1 fonts, see PostScript fonts

Up key 3-7

Upper source

Location 2-4

Upper tray

Loading paper 2-19 to 2-23

Location 2-9

I n d e x

❖

IX-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IX-8 ❖

4 5 2 0 / 4 5 2 0 m p U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Weed Eater Trimmer 530163479 User Manual
Westinghouse Toaster WST3013ZE User Manual
Whirlpool Air Conditioner 66126277 User Manual
Whirlpool Freezer CF 51 T User Manual
Whirlpool Range 9757454 User Manual
Whirlpool Washer 3775 User Manual
Whirlpool Washer GCAM2792LQ0 User Manual
Wolf Appliance Company Ventilation Hood PWC422418R User Manual
Wolfgang Puck Toaster BTOT0010 User Manual
Zanussi Fryer 200352 User Manual